2005 Hyundai Tucson Owners Manual

2005

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

A030A01JM

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01JM-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standardequipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A01JM-AAT

B250A01JM-U

1. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)2. 4WD Lock Switch (If installed)3. Traction Control System (TCS) Switch (If installed) /

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed)4. Instrument Cluster5. Multi-Function Light Switch (If installed)6. Front Window Defroster (If installed)7. Hazard Warning Light Switch8. Digital Clock9. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

10. Rear Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirror Heater Switch(If installed)

11. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)12. Passenger's Airbag13. Hood Release Lever14. Horn and Driver's Airbag15. Small Article Tray / Ashtray (If installed)16. Cruise Control Switch (If installed)17. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)18. Shift Lever (If installed)19. Glove Box

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

B255A01JM-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-44.

Parking Brake/Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator Light

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime (If installed)

Traction Control Indicator Light

(If installed)

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

Electronic Stability Program IndicatorLights (If installed)

Cruise Indicator (If installed)

4WD Lock Indicator Light (If installed)

4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

SET Indicator Light (If installed)

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door .............................................................................. 1-4Power Windows .......................................................... 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-12Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-17Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-23Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) system................. 1-30Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-42Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-44Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-52Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-54Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-60Mirror ........................................................................... 1-65How to use Luggage Room ........................................ 1-71Hood Release ............................................................. 1-77Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-80Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-84Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-101Audio System............................................................ 1-103Antenna ..................................................................... 1-135

1

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

B010A01JM

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A04A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

UNLEADED

FUEL ONLY

! CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light may illumi-nate.


3KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same key oper-ates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,because the doors can be locked without a key,carrying a spare key is recommended in caseyou accidentally lock one key inside the car.

B030A01HR


4

B030C01E-1

DOOR LOCKS

!B040A01A-AATB030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH(If installed)

Whenever either front door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for your conve-nience, provided the ignition switch is not in the"ON" position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be opened fromthe inside. This helps ensure that thedoors will not be opened accidentally.Also, when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking the doors helpskeep occupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

B030B01A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01HR


5

UNLOCK

LOCK

HJM2007

B040B01JM-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors with akey

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds. Thepassenger's side will lock or unlock alldoors with just one rotation.

B040C01JM

B040C02O-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Driver's side - without key)

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-tral door locking system, the door willnot lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and the tail gatewhen leaving your vehicle unattended.


6

The door can be locked without a key. To lockthe door, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.

B045C01JM-AAT

Locking From the Outside(Passenger's side - Without key)


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, only the passengers door will belocked.

o If your vehicle is equipped with the cen-tral door locking system, the door willnot lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors are closed.

o When locking the door this way, be care-ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To reduce the chances of theft, alwaysremove the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and the tail gatewhen leaving your vehicle unattended.

B045C01JM

B040D01O-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Driver's side)

To lock the door from the inside, simply close thedoor and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position.


driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even if thelock switch is depressed.

HJM2008

UNLOCKLOCK


7

B045D01JM-AAT

Locking From the Inside(Passenger's side)

To lock the door from the inside, simply close thedoor and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the passenger's inside door handles can beused.


passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, only the passenger's door locks.

o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.

HJM2008-D

UNLOCKLOCK

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " "position and close the door. Move the lever tothe opposite direction of " " position whennormal door operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

HJM2011

B040G02HP-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is located onthe driver's arm rest. It is operated by depress-ing the door lock switch.

NOTE:o When pushing the front portion of the

driver's door lock switch, all vehicledoors will lock. If any door is open whenthe switch is depressed, the door willremain locked when closed.

o When pushing the rear portion of theswitch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

o The central door locking is operated byturning the key in the driver's door locktoward the front or rear of the vehicle.

HJM2009


8

B070B01JMUNLOCK

LOCK

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B075B01O-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

B070A01A-AAT

(If installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal lights.

B070F02O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal

lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-ter.

2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

!


9

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the hood and tail gate areclosed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

NOTE:o If any door, the tail gate or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed. If this happens, rearm the systemas described above.

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushing the"LOCK" button on the transmitter, thesiren will sound once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

!

B075C01JM-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The tail gate is opened without using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

3) The hood is opened.

The siren will sound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for about 30 seconds (Thiswill repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,unlock the door or tail gate using the transmitteror the ignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

B075D01JM-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

The driver's door is unlocked by depressingonce the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UN-LOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed, the turnsignal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

NOTE :The system will rearm if a door, tailgate, orhood is not opened within 30 seconds.


10

B070E02HP-AAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facingdown), then insert it in the transmitter.

HJM2004

Screwdriver

B070E01JM

Battery

Case

B075E01JM-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the back side ofthe transmitter.

2. At the same time, the siren will sound and theturn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"button again on the transmitter.

B075E01JM

PANIC


11POWER WINDOWS

B060A03Y-AAT

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. The main switchesare located on the driver's armrest and controlthe front and rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be opened by de-pressing the appropriate window switch andclosed by pulling up the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switchhalfway down. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated. To fully open the driver'swindow automatically, press the switch fullydown. In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch. To stopat the desired opening, pull up and release theswitch.

B060A03JM

!In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch isprovided on the armrest of the driver's door. Todisable the power windows, press the windowlock switch. To revert to normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can nolonger be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.

WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for theirsafety.

HJM2016

Close Open

HJM2017


12

HJM2033

!

B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

HJM2031

SEATS

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

! WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury, or property damage.


13

! WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver and passenger seatbacks shouldalways be in an upright position while thevehicle is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags in afrontal collision may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are reclined.There is greater risk that the driver andpassenger will slide under the seat beltwhich may result in serious injury if a crashoccurs when the seatbacks are reclined.The seat belt and airbags cannot provideproper protection to an occupant if the seatback is reclined.

!B080D03JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob. To removethe headrest, raise it as far as it can go thenpress the lock knob while pulling upward. Thisshould only be done when the seat is notoccupied.

HJM2044

B080D01JM

WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case of an

accident the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protectionagainst neck injuries when properly ad-justed.

o Do not adjust the headrest hejght whilethe vehicle is in motion.

Lock Knob


14

!

HJM2041

B080H02JM-GAT

Seatback table

The seatback table is made by folding the frontpassenger seat forward.

To operate the seatback table

1. Lower the headrest.2. With the recliner control lever pulled up, fold

the front passenger seatback forward to theflat position.

3. When returning the seatback to the uprightposition, ensure the seatback is completelylocked into place.

Recliner control lever

WARNING:o Do not sit on the seatback table.o Do not place items on the seatback table

when the vehicle is in motion.o Do not leave items on the seatback table

when the vehicle is in motion.

B100A02JM-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If installed)

HJM2042

B080F01A-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-ward.

HJM2035


15

!

The seat warmer is provided to warm the frontseats during cold weather. With the ignition keyin the "ON" position, push either of the switchesto warm the driver's seat or the passenger'sseat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:o The seat warmer will not operate if the

ambient temperature is higher than82.4°F ± 3.5°F (28°C ± 3.5°C).

o If the seat warmer doesn't work whenambient temperature is lower than 75.2°F(24°C), it should be checked at an autho-rized dealer.

WARNING:It is recommended that the seat heater notbe used when elderly people or people whoare ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use theseat warmer if the occupant is sleeping.

B085A01JM-GAT

REAR SEATAdjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, pull the seatbackfolding lever and release it after the desiredseatback angle is achieved.When you recline the seatback to desired po-sition, always be sure it has locked into position.

HJM2046

Seatbackfolding lever

!

HJM2047

B085B02JM-AAT

Folding Rear Seatback

For convenience, the seatbacks and seat cush-ions may be folded down and up.

CAUTION:When reclining the seatback, you shouldadjust the seatback folding lever whilestanding.

1. Pull the seatback folding lever then pushdown the seatback.

2. Be sure it has locked into position to listen anaudible "Click".


16

!

!

3. To return the seatback to its normal position,pull the seatback folding lever and reversethe above procedure.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it is locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

WARNING:o The purpose of the fold-down rear seat

back is to allow you to carry larger itemsthan could otherwise be accommodated.Never allow passengers to sit on thecargo area while the car is moving. Thisis not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use when theseat back is folded down.This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or a suddenstop. Objects should not extend higherthan the top of the front seatbacks.This could allow cargo to slide forwardand cause injury or damage during sud-den stops.

o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down,be careful not to damage the seatbeltwebbing or buckle. In addition, do notallow the seatbelt webbing or buckle toget caught or pinched in the rear seat.

o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position, be sure it is locked intoposition. Attempt to move it.

o Never attempt to fold or return seat whilethe vehicle is moving.

WARNING:

HJM2048

!

NOTE:o Before folding the seatback, place the

rear seat belt buckles in the buckle pouchon the seatback. This will prevent theseat belt buckles from becoming cov-ered by the seat cushion when it isreturned to the seating position.

CAUTION:Be careful not to overload seatback. Over-loading may cause damage the seatback.


17

!B140A01B-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback.

B140A01JM

SEAT BELTS

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-23.

!

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-30. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws require that someor all occupants of the vehicle use seatbelts. The possibility of increased injury orseverity of injury in an accident will beincreased if this elementary safety precau-tion is not observed. In addition, follow theother instructions provided in this section.

! WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-23.


18

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-20.

!B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.


19

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

HJM2050

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

B170A04Y-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.


20

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking Retractor

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, Hyundaistrongly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-27.

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe ignition key is in the "ON" position, theseat belt warning light will flash and thewarning chime will sound for approximatelysix seconds.

! WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o The misadjustment of height of the

shoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.

B180A01A-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

B180A01L


21

!

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passanger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

WARNING:o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A

twisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01L


22

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt, you

must lock all metal tabs and buckles. Ifany metal tab or buckle is not locked, itwill increase the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.

B220A01JM-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat 3-PointSystem With combination Locking Re-tractor

1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) arelatched together.

2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

There will be an audible "click" when the tablocks in the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyadjusts to the proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let you move

around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

(d)B220A02Y

B220A01JM

(a)

(b)

(c)

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01L


23

!(1)In case of folding rear seatbacks down.(2) If transporting an object on the rear

seat may cause damage to the rearseat center belt.

o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)immediately after folding rear seatbacksup.

o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from thebuckle (b) , insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle(b).

WARNING:

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03O-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carseat and seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the manufac-turer when installing the child restraint system.

!

B220C01Y-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, pressthe button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:The rear seat center belt latching mecha-nism is different from those for the out-board rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-tening the outboard rear seat shoulder beltsor the rear seat center belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper operation.

B220C01JM

B220A02JM

o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b), place metal (a) in the seat beltclip not to make noise while driving.


24

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders for install-ing the child seat or infant seat.

!WARNING:o Always make sure that the shoulder belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer toward theseat belt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt must always bepositioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards and thatit is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

!! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the luggage compartmentor fasten it with a safety belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in the case of asudden stop or an accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passanger seat.


25

B230C05O-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear luggage compartment floor.

To install the child restraint seat tether

This symbol indicates the location of each userready tether anchorage.

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearluggage compartment floor.

B230C04JM

B230C05JM

Tetheranchor cover

Child RestraintHook Holder

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.

Rear luggage compartment floor

B230B01JM

Front of Vehicle

ChildRestraintHookHolders

Tether StrapHook


26

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint seat at the

center of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child safety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

!

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat withthe "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachments thatconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at specificseating positions in your vehicle. This type ofchild seat eliminates the need to use seat beltsto attach the child seat for forward-facing childseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for thecenter rear seating position.

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to securethe seat.

WARNING:o Install the Child Restraint Seat fully rear-

ward against the seatback with theseatback in a vertical position, not re-clined.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

B230D01JM


27

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIXor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint seat, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.Also, test the safety seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see if theanchors hold the seat in place.

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

ISOFIX Anchor

B230D02JM

B230D03JM

B230F01JM-AAT

Installation on Rear Seat Center Position

To install a child restraint system in the centerrear seat, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

B235G02JM


28

HXG229

In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

B180B02JM-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activatedwith or without airbag activation, depending onthe circumstances of a collision.

!

B230G01O-AAT

Installation on Outboard Rear Seats

WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

To install a child restraint system in the outboardrear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

After installation of the child restraint system, tryto move it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If you needto tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward theretractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt andallow it to retract, the retractor will automaticallyrevert back to its normal seated passengerEmergency Locking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.

B235G03JM


29

!

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. Buckle pre-tensioner assembly4. SRS control module

WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belt may be activated withor without airbag activation, dependingon the circumstances of a collision. Thepre-tensioners will be activated even ifthe seat belts are not being worn at thetime of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washall exposed skin areas thoroughly afteran accident in which the pre-tensionerseat belts were activated.

B180B01JM

Driver's airbag 1

2

4

Passenger'sairbag

3

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag

is connected with the pre-tensioner seatbelts. The SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds after the igni-tion key has been turned to the "ON"position, and then it should turn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after approximately6 seconds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

AIRBAG

!


30

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)B240A01E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advancedSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. Theindications of the system's presence are theletters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbagpad cover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt system alone, incase of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

The SRS uses a collection of sensors to gatherinformation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's and frontpassenger's seat belt usage and impact sever-ity.

The driver's and front passenger's seat positionsensors, which are installed on the seat track,determine if the seats are fore or aft of areference position. Similarly, the seat belt usagesensors determine if the driver and frontpassenger's seat belts are fastened. Thesesensors provide the ability to control the SRSdeployment based on how close the driver'sseat is to the steering wheel, how close thepassenger's seat is to the instrument panel,whether or not the seat belts are fastened, andhow severe is the impact.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to controlthe airbag inflation with two levels. A first stagelevel is provided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided for moresevere impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating posi-tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRSControl Module) controls the airbag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an accident.

B240A01JM

Driver's Airbag


31

!

CAUTION:If the seat position sensor is not workingproperly, the SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate even ifthere is no malfunction of the SRS airbagsystem, because the SRS airbag warninglight is connected with the seat positionsensor. If the SRS airbag warning light doesnot illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, if it remainsilluminated after coming on for approxi-mately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, have an autho-rized Hyundai dealer inspect the seat posi-tion sensor and the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

!

WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat position sensorand cause the airbag to deploy at adifferent level than should be provided.

o Do not place any objects underneath thefront seats which could damage the seatposition sensor or interfere with theoccupant classification system.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seats.These may cause a malfunction of theseat position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the back-side of the sun visor and in the glove box.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in fron-tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-tended to deploy in light collisions inwhich protection can be provided by thepre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

AIRBAG

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with anoccupant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The occupant classificationsystem detects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-cation System" later in this section.

! WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver's and the passenger's threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore, your seatbelts must be worn at all times. Theairbags deploy only in certain frontalimpact conditions severe enough tocause significant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

o Sitting too close to a front airbag canresult in serious or fatal injury if the frontairbags inflate. Always sit as far backfrom airbags as possible.

o Ignoring the SRS indicator light can re-sult in serious or fatal injury if the airbags,occupant classification system or pre-tensioners do not work properly. Haveyour car checked by a dealer as soon aspossible if the SRS warning light alertsyou to a potential problem.

o The SRS is designed to deploy the frontairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle. The frontairbags will not deploy in side, rear orrollover impacts. Additionally, theairbags will only deploy once. Seat beltsmust be worn at all times.


32

B240A02JM

!

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

WARNING:o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, airbags will notdeploy in frontal crashes below the de-ployment threshold.

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Do not install a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and the seat is moved back as faras possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o Sitting improperly or out of position canresult in serious or fatal injury in a crash.All occupants should sit upright in theirseats with their feet on the floor until thevehicle is parked and the ignition key isremoved.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

! WARNING:


33

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) onthe instrument panel will illuminate for about 6seconds after the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine is started, afterwhich the SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impactto the front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the front airbags.

B240B01JM-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's Airbag Module2. Passenger's Airbag Module3. Knee Bolster4. Pre-tensioner Seat Belt5. Front Impact Sensor6. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Usage Sensors/Buckle pre-tensioner7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Posi-

tion Sensors8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)10.Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)

B240B02JM

11

1

2 710

7 9

5

6

4

348

3

B240B01L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

B240B02L


34

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with aproperly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, reducing therisk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility, and the ability to steer oroperate other controls.

! WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust generat-ed during airbag deployment may causeskin irritation. Wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.

!

Passenger's Airbag

B240B01JMB240B03L

Passenger's Airbag

B240B05L


35

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not illuminate or contin-uously remains on after illuminating forabout 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, or afterthe engine is started, illuminates whiledriving, the SRS is not working properly.If this occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

WARNING:

B990A01JM-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

If your instrument panel has the indicator pic-tured in the following illustration, your vehiclehas an occupant classification system.

The indicator will be visible when you turn theignition key to START or RUN. The words"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" will be visible onthe instrument panel during the system check.When the system check is complete, the pas-senger sensing system will turn off the right frontpassenger's frontal air bag under certain con-ditions. The driver's air bag and the side impactair bags are not affected by the occupantclassification system.

B990A01JM

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

The occupant classification system works withsensors that are part of the right frontpassenger's seat and seat belt. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a prop-erly-seated occupant and determine if thepassenger's frontal air bag should beenabled(may inflate) or not.

! WARNING:o A child in a rear-facing child restraint can

be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger's air bag inflates.

o The safest place for children is in the rearseat. Rearward and forward facing childrestraint and booster seats must only beused in the rear seat.

o Children under the age of 13 must al-ways ride in the rear seat, properly re-strained in child restraints or with thevehicle seat belts, depending upon theirsize.

NOTE:Many times an indicator light is a sign thatthere is a need for service. In the case of theoccupant classification system indicator, itdoes not mean there is a need for service.It informs the occupants of the status of theright front passenger's airbag on or off.


36

!

The occupant classification system is designedto enable(may inflate) the right front passenger'sfrontal air bag anytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger's seat. When the passen-ger sensing system has allowed the air bag tobe enabled, the indicator will turn off and stayturned off to remind you that the air bag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the occu-pant classification system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger's frontal air bag,depending upon the person's seating postureand body build.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger's seat, but the indicator is turned on,it could be because that person isn't sittingproperly in the seat. The right front passengershould sit upright, centered on the seat cushion,with their seat belt on and legs comfortablyextended, feet on the floor, and with the seat inan upright position.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers,can affect how the occupant classification sys-tem operates. Do not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment if your vehicle has theoccupant classification system.

!B990B02JM-AAT

Passenger Air Bag Status IndicatorIf your vehicle has the occupant classificationsystem, your instrument panel will have a pas-senger air bag status indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN orSTART, the passenger air bag status indicatorwill be turned on and off for several seconds asa system check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will be turned onor off to let you know the status of the right frontpassenger's frontal air bag.If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator isilluminated, it means that the right frontpassenger's frontal air bag is disabled. If theindicator is not illuminated, it means that the rightfront passenger's frontal air bag is enabled.

B990A01JM

CAUTION:Stowing of articles under the passenger'sseat or between the passenger's seat cush-ion and seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the occupant classifi-cation system.

WARNINGEveryone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly -- whether or notthere is an air bag for that person.


37

The occupant classification system can func-tion only when the ignition key is in the "ON"position. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by an adult whois seated properly sitting upright and with theseat in an upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with their seat belt on and legs comfort-ably extended feet on the floor, have yourvehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundaidealer.

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" status indi-cator light is on or off under the followingconditions;

!

"PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF"

Status Indicator light

OFF

ON

ON

Passenger status de-

tected by the occupant

classification system

1. Adult *1

2. Child *2 or

child restraint system

3. Unoccupied (Empty)

Right front

passenger

air bag

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

WARNING:o A child in a rear-facing child restraint can

be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger's air bag inflates. Don'tuse a rear-facing child restraint in theright front passenger's seat.

o If the indicator and the air bag readinesslight ever illuminate at the same time, itmeans that something may be wrongwith the air bag system. If this everhappens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger seatmay not have the supplemental protec-tion of the frontal air bag.

o If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the passenger'sairbag is connected with the occupantclassification system.

o If there is a malfunction of the occupantclassification system, the "PASSENGERAIR BAG" indicator will illuminate andthe front passenger's airbag will notdeploy in frontal crashes.

! WARNING:o If the SRS airbag warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition key is turnedto "ON" position, if it remains illumi-nated after coming on for approximately6 seconds, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system with the SRS airbag systemas soon as possible.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger's seat. Theinfant or child could be severely injuredor killed by an airbag deployment in caseof an accident. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the front seat.Children who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occupythe rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. Children are afforded themost safety in the event of an accidentwhen they are restrained by a properrestraint system in the rear seat.*1)The system judges a person of adult size as

an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the system may detect him/her as a child depending on his/her physiqueand posture.

*2) When a larger child who has outgrown a childrestraint system sits in the passenger seat,the system may detect him/her as an adultdepending on his/her physique and posture.


38

! WARNING:! WARNING:o The occupant classification system can

function only when the ignition key is inthe "ON" position. If the "PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seat is occu-pied by an adult who is seated properly(sitting upright with the seat in an up-right position, centered on the seat cush-ion, with the person's legs comfortablyextended, and feet on the floor), haveyour vehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.

o If luggage or other objects are placed onthe front passenger's seat, the "Passen-ger Airbag Off" indicator may be illumi-nated. These conditions do not indicatea problem.

o If an adult front seat passenger changestheir seating position(for example, notsitting upright, sitting slouched , sittingwith legs spread, or otherwise being outof position), the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator may illuminate, and thepassenger's airbag may illuminate notdeploy in a collision. Always be sure tosit properly in the front passenger seatand wear the seat belt properly.

o Do not modify or replace the front pas-senger seat. Don't place or attach any-thing on the front passenger seat. Thiscan adversely affect the occupant clas-sification system.

o Do not install accessory seat covers onthe front passenger seats.

B990B01JM-AAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02JM


39

! WARNING:

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Your seat belts must be worn at alltimes while the vehicle is in motion. Theairbags deploy only in certain side im-pact conditions severe enough to causesignificant injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

o For best protection from the side impactairbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,

!

HTB072

Side airbagsensor

both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on or near

the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact air baginflates.

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury, avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key is on.

B990C01LZ-GAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along both sides ofthe roof rails above the front and rear doors.They are designed to help protect the heads ofthe front seat occupants and the rear outboardseat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side impact collisions, dependingon the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.The curtain airbags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in most rolloversituations.

HJM2056

Curtain Airbag


40

!o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that

this manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, don't tryto start the engine; have the car towed toan authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not replace the bumper or the bumperguard with the one other than the Hyundaigenuine parts. Otherwise, it can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto an increased risk of injury.

WARNING:o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use

only a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental inflation of the airbagsor by rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

! WARNING:

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

B240C01JM-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. If the SRS SRI (Service ReminderIndicator) does not illuminate, or continu-ously remains on, have your vehicle imme-diately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performed bya qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the airbag system may result inserious personal injury.


41

B240D01JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright, fully back in the seat,with your seat belt on, and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.


42 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A01JM-AAT

B260A01JM-U


43

1. Tachometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 3. Seat Belt Warning Light 4. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System

Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) 5. Speedometer 6. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light 7. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 8. High Beam Indicator Light 9. Fuel Gauge10. Low Fuel Warning Light11. Tail Gate Open Warning Light12. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)/

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)

13. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)14. Immobilizer Warning Light (If installed)15. Door Ajar Warning Light16. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)17. Odometer/ Trip odmeter18. Trip Computer (If installed)19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)20. Charging System Warning Light21. Coolant Temperature Gauge22. Cruise Indicator (If installed)23. 4WD Lock Indicator Light24. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)


44 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) ServiceReminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson for about 6 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position or after the engineis started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after coming on forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260E02O-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Chime

The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seatbelt is fastened when the ignition key is turnedfrom the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" andthe warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!


45

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warning lightshould come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

B260J02A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-21 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260B01JM-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the tail gate and/ortail gate window is completely closed and latched.


46

B260L02HP-GAT

Door ajar warning light and chime(If Installed)

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch and thedriver's side front door is open simulta-neously. The chime sounds until the key isremoved from the ignition switch or thedriver's side front door is closed.

!

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260N01A-AAT

Malfunction Indicator Light

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go out ina few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, ordoes not illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, take your car to yournearest authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake ForceDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B265C01O-AAT

Traction Control IndicatorLights (If installed)

The traction control indicators change opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether the system is in operation or not.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS.


47

B260T01O-GAT

4WD System Warning Light(If installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning lightwill come on and then go off in a few seconds.

CAUTION:If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinkswhile driving, this indicates that there is amalfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle checked by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.

!

B265C01LZ-AAT

Electronic StabilityProgram Indicator Lights(If installed)

The electronic stability program indicatorschange operation according to the ignition switchposition and whether the system is in operationor not.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the ESP.

B260V01JM-GAT

4WD Lock Indicator Light(If installed)

The 4WD (Four Wheel Drive) lock indicator lightin the instrument cluster is illuminated when theThe 4WD lock switch is pushed.The purpose of this switch is to increase thedrive power when driving on wet pavement,snow-covered roads and/or off-road.The 4WD lock indicator light is turned off bypushing the switch again.

NOTE:Do not use 4WD on normal dry pavementconditions.

B260R01E-GAT

SET Indicator Light(If installed)

The SET indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the cruise control switch ispushed downward to "SET (COAST)".The SET indicator light does not illuminate whenthe control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B260Q01E-GAT

Cruise Indicator Light(If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control mainswitch on the end of the barrel is pushed.When the cruise control main switch is pusheda second time, the cruise control system will beand the light will turn off.Information on the use of cruise control may befound on page 1-79.


48

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when new pads areneeded. The sound may come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicle is moving. Itmay also be heard when the brake pedal ispushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damagewill result if the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

!

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in Section 9.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

HJM2182

HJM2181


49

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

!

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

The needle on the engine coolant temperaturegauge should stay in the normal range. If it movesacross the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and stop assoon as possible and turn off the engine. Thenopen the hood and, after the engine has cooled,check the coolant level and the water pump drivebelt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, haveyour cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B300A01JMB330A01JM


50

ResetSwitch

B310B02JM

HJM2185

A Type

B Type

B310B02JM-EAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

1. OdometerThe odometer records the total driving distancein miles and is useful for keeping a record formaintenance intervals.

NOTE:Any alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.

B310B04JM

2. Trip odometer

This mode indicates the drive distance travelledsince the last reset.

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B02JM-AAT

(If installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as a tripmeter,average fuel consumption and distance to emptyon the LCD.

HJM2185


51

2. Distance to Empty

B400B03JM-A

o This mode indicates the estimated distanceto empty with the current fuel in the fuel tankand distance to empty symbol.

o When refueling with more than 2 gallons (8liters), the trip computer will recognize refu-eling. If less fuel is added, the trip computermay not reset.

o For an accurate distance to empty, drivemore than 62miles after refueling the tank.

o When the distance to empty is less than31miles, the symbol will come on constantlyand the distance to empty digits will flash"----" until more fuel is added.

A Type

B Type

1. Tripmeter

TRIPMETER

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTIONB400B01JM-A

o This mode indicates the total distance trav-elled since the last tripmeter reset. Totaldistance is also reset to zero if the battery isdisconnected.

o Pressing the trip computer switch for morethan 1 second, when the tripmeter is beingdisplayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to 621miles (999.9kms)

A Type

B Type

Trip Computer Switch

o The trip computer switch is used to zero themulti-functional display mode.

o Pushing in the trip computer switch behindthe right side of the steering wheel changesthe display as follows;


52 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

B400B02JM-A

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to drivingcondition habits.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

3. Average Fuel Consumption

A Type

B Type

o This mode calculates the average fuel con-sumption from the total fuel used and thedistance since the last average consump-tion reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuelconsumption input.

o For an accurate calculation, drive more than31 miles.

o The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 99.9miles per gallon.


53

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The High BeamIndicator Light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

B340C03A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

HJM2089 HJM2084

HJM2088


54 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

B340G01L-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

B350A01JM-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiperor activate the windshield wiper bladedeicer.(If installed)

B350B01JM-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make three passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

HJM2085 HJM2092-U

B350A01JM-U


55

B350C01O-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.It also can be varied by vehicle speeds withinsame time.

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-wards.

HJM2093-UHJM2091-U

B390A01JM-AAT

Rear Window Wiper And Washer(If installed)

HJM2096-U

1. : The rear window wiper starts to oper-ate three times after the washer fluidsprays onto the rear window.

2.OFF3.INT: The interval between wipes operates

every 5 seconds intermittently.4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to oper-

ate continuously.5. : The washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window and the wiper oper-ates while the rear window wiper bar-rel is placed in this position.


56

HJM2098

HJM2097

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMFRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

B360A04A-AAT

(If installed)

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in thesecond position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

Do not operate the washer continuously formore than 15 seconds or when the fluid reser-voir is empty; this could damage the system. Donot operate the wiper when the window is dry;this can result in scratching as well as prema-ture wiper blade wear.


57

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!B380A01Y-AAT

Rear Window Defroster Switch

The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 15 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

B385A01JM-AAT

Windshield wiper Blade De-icer(If installed)

The windshield wiper blade de-icer is turned onby pushing in the switch. To turn the de-icer off,push the switch a second time. The windshieldwiper blade de-icer automatically turns itself offafter about 20 minutes.

HJM2101

WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

HJM2104


58 CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A01A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

B410A01JMHJM2137 B420A01JM


59

HJM2159

ASHTRAY / COIN TRAY

B430A01JM-AAT

The front ashtray/coin tray may be opened bypushing and releasing the ashtray lid. To re-move the ashtray to empty or clean it, lift theashtray upward and pull it out. The ashtray cointray light will only illuminate when the externallights are on.

B430A01JM

POWER OUTLETS

!

B500D02JM-GAT

(If installed)

These are located in the quarter trim and on therear main console.These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment only whenthe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

CAUTION:o Use when the engine is running and re-

move a plug form the power outlet afterusing the electric appliance. Using whenthe engine stops or remaining the electricappliance with plugged in for many hoursmay cause the battery to be discharged.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipment otherthan those designed to operate on 12 volts.

HJM2156

DRINK HOLDER

!

B450A01JM-AAT

Front Drink Holder

The front drink holder is located on the mainconsole .

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim andelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. The objects canbe thrown out in the event of a suddenstop or an accident, possibly injuringthe passengers in the vehicle.


60 SUNROOF

!

B460A01Y-AAT

(If installed)Sun Shade

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sun-shade which you can manually adjust to let inlight with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

! WARNING:Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. This objects can bethrown out in the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.

B450B01JM-AAT

REAR DRINK HOLDER(If installed)

The rear drink holders is located in the rear seatarm rest. The rear drink holder can be used bypulling the rear seat armrest.

HJM2160 HJM2029

B460B01JM-GAT

Opening the Sunroof

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, youcan slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroofcontrol buttons located on the overhead con-sole.The sunroof can only be opened, closed, ortilted when the ignition switch is in the "ON"position.

HJM2024


61

B460C01JM-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof

Auto tilt open

To use the autotilt feature, momentarily (morethan 1 second) press the TILT UP button on theoverhead console. The sunroof will tilt all theway open. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point,press any sunroof control button.

Manual tilt open

Press the TILT UP button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

HJM2025

! WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

!

Sliding the sunroofAuto slide open

To use the autoslide feature, momentarily (morethan 1 second) press the SLIDE OPEN buttonon the overhead console. The sunroof will slideall the way open. To stop the sunroof sliding atany point, press any sunroof control button.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

Close

To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE buttonon the overhead console and hold it until thesunroof is closed.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof control buttonlonger than necessary.Damage to the motor or system compo-nents could occur.


62

Close

To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE buttonon the overhead console and hold it until thesunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

B460D03B-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

2. Remove the mounting screws of the frontoverhead console with a (+) driver.

HJM2026

HJM2027

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior lightlenses in the front overhead console byusing a flat blade screwdriver.


63INTERIOR LIGHT

B480B01JM-AAT

Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light is convenient as a map light atnight or as a personal light for the driver and thepassenger.

HJM2028

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle's glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-terclockwise to close the sunroof.

B460E01JM-GAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnectedor discharged, or you use the emergency handleto operate the sunroof, you have to reset yoursunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.2. According to the position of the sunroof, do

as follows.1) In case that the sunroof has closed com-

pletely or been tilted : Press the TILT UPbutton for 1 second.

2) In case that the sunroof has slide-opened:Press and hold the CLOSE button formore than 5 seconds until the sunroofhas closed completely. And then pressthe TILT UP button for 1 second

3. Then, release it.4. Press and hold the TILT UP button once again

until the sunroof has returned to the originalposition of TILT UP after it is raised a littlehigher than the maximum TILT UP position.When this is complete, the sunroof systemis reset.

CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operateproperly.

!

HJM2099

Without Sunroof

With sunroof


64

HJM2145

B490A01JM-AAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

The interior courtesy light has two buttons. Thetwo buttons are:

o DOORIn the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

o ONIn the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes. Do not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the vehicle is notrunning.

HJM2100 HJM2158

GLOVE BOXSPECTACLE CASE

!

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

!

B491A03O-GAT

(If Installed)

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open the spectaclecase.

WARNING:Do not keep objects except spectacle in-side the spectacle case. Such objects canbe thrown out in the event of a sudden stopor an accident, possibly injuring the pas-sengers in the vehicle.

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.


65

B510A01A-AAT

Manual Type

The outside rearview mirrors are equipped witha remote control for your convenience. It isoperated by the control lever in the bottom frontcorner of the window.Before driving away, always check that yourmirrors are positioned so you can see behindyou, both to the left and right sides, as well asdirectly behind your vehicle. When using themirror, always exercise caution when attempt-ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind oralong side of you.

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice, donot attempt to break it free using the controlhandle or by manipulating the face of themirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (notradiator antifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.

!B500B01O-AAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automatically turn onthe light when the multi-function switch is turnedto the first/second position.

B510A01JM


66

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both rightand left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-priate perimeter switch as illustrated.

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If installed)

HJM2104

HJM2073

!WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!B510D01Y-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER(If installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 15 minutes.


67DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEWMIRROR

!

B510C01A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRRORS

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push themtoward the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause serious injury ordeath.

B520A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HJM2070

B510C01JM

B520C02JM-AAT

AUTOMATIC DIMMING REAR VIEWMIRROR WITH COMPASS(If installed)

The automatic dimming rear view mirror auto-matically controls the glare of headlights of thecar behind you when turned on by pushing the"MIRROR" button.It is turned off by pushing the button once more.

HJM2072


68

2. Press the "COMP" button for more than 3seconds. The current zone number willappear in the display.

3. Press the "COMP" button until the new zonenumber appears in the display. After youstop pressing the button, the display willshow a compass direction within a few sec-onds.

! CAUTION:1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

attached to the vehicle by means of amagnet. They affect the operation of thecompass.

2. If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjust-ment, have the compass checked at anauthorized dealer.

3. The compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass point in tunnels or whiledriving up or down a steep hill.(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehicle movesto an area where the geomagnetism isstabilized.)

3.Calibration procedure

If the display is "C", calibrate the compass.

- Drive the vehicle in a circle in a safe, openarea at less than 5miles/h 3 times or until thecompass heading appears.

- Driving in a circle in a right-handed directionand opposite direction are possible, and if thecalibration is completed, the compass head-ing will appear.

- Keep driving in a circle until a compassheading appears.

4.Setting the compass zone

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the zone map.

CAUTION:When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towelor similar material dampened with glasscleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror as that may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

1.To operate the compass feature

The compass is a convenient feature whichdisplays the compass heading of the vehicle.

!

2."COMP" switch

Push the "COMP" switch on the lower part of themirror, then the vehicle's directional heading willbe displayed. Pushing the "COMP" switch againwill turn off the display.

Heading display

- E : East- W : West- S : South- N : North

ex) NE : North East

B520C06JM


69

!

TAIL GATE

B540A01JM-AAT

o Pull and raise the "DOOR" release lever toopen the tail gate.

o To close, lower the door, then press down onit until it locks. To be sure the door is securelyfastened, try to pull it up again.

HJM2012HJM3026

PARKING BRAKE

B530A01A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the vehicle. This also turns on the parkingbrake indicator light when the key is in the "ON"or "START" position. Before driving away, besure that the parking brake is fully released andthe indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up andpress the thumb button. Then, while holdingthe button in, lower the brake lever.

WARNING:The tail gate should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaustgases may enter the car resulting in seriousillness or death to the occupants. See addi-tional warnings concerning exhaust gaseson page 2-2.

B540B01JM-AAT

Tail gate Window

o Pull the "GLASS" release lever (1) to openthe tailgate window glass, and raise thewindow open lever (2).

o To close the tail gate window, lower the tailgate window, and it will close by itself.To be sure the tail gate window is securelyfastened, try to pull it up again.

NOTE:The tail gate window lock is operated inconnection with the tail gate lock. To openthe tail gate window make sure the tailgateis unlocked with a key or the central doorlocking switch.

HJM2013(1) (2)


70

B540C01JM-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

Luggage compartment light has a 3-positionswitch. The three positions are:

o In the "DOOR" position, the luggage com-partment light comes on when the tail gate isopened, then goes out when it is closed.

o In the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

o In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes.

HHR2070

B540A01JM-AAT

SHOPPING BAG HOLDERSShopping bag holders are located in the frontconsole and on the backside of the rear seat.When not in use, return it to the original position.

HJM2150

HJM2151

CAUTION:o Do not hang a bag beyond 6 Ibs (3 kg).

It may cause damage to the shoppingbag holder.

o Return it to the original position afterusing the shopping bag holder.

!

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT


71

B650A01S-AAT

Stowage Precautions

1. Do not place objects on the cargo securityscreen. Such objects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicleoccupants during an accident or when brak-ing.

2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnec-essary weight.

3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagecompartment. It is designed for luggageonly.

4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle andlocate the weight as far forward as possible.

!

HOW TO USE LUGGAGE ROOM

B640A01JM

B650A02JM-GAT

Cargo Area Cover (If installed)

Nothing should be carried on top of the luggagecover. Loose materials could result in injury tovehicle occupants during sudden braking.

Before using the luggage under tray, hang thecargo area cover hook to the weather strip.

Place the cargo area cover hook in the stowedposition while not in use.

HJM2165


72

Raise the luggage under tray cover with the grip.After using it lock the luggage under tray coverby turning the lever toward "LOCK".

HJM2168HJM2167

Before using the luggage under tray, removethe luggage mat. Turn the lever toward "UN-LOCK".

HJM2166

B545B02JM-GAT

Luggage Under Tray

There is a multipurpose tray under the luggagemat.


73

Luggage Side Trim

HJM2163

There are small article trays in the luggage sidetrim.

B655A01JM-GAT

Covering shelf screen (If Installed)

Covering shelf screen veils the luggage room tohang the screen hook to a headrest pole.

B655A01JM

While not in use, place the screen hook to thehook holder.

B655A02JM


74

!

B540D03HP-GAT

Luggage Net (If Installed)

Some objects can be kept in the net in theluggage compartment.Use the luggage net on the floor or at the backof the luggage compartment to prevent objectsfrom sliding.

B540D01JM

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.

WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. AL-WAYS keep face and body out of its path.DO NOT use when the luggage net strapshave visible signs of wear or damage.

ROOF RACK

B630A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails andfixing components to adapt the roof rack on yourvehicle may be obtained from an authorizedHyundai dealer.

CAUTION:o In case a sunroof is installed, do not

position roof rack loads that could inter-fere with opening of the sunroof.

o The following specifications are recom-mended when loading cargo or luggage.

!

HJM2162


75

HJM2018

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE

B560A02JM-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe vehicle.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid (donot use radiator anti-freeze) or move thevehicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

!

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A01A-AAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.

B550A01JM

165 lbs (75 kg) EvenlyDistributed

ROOF RACK

CAUTION:

o Loading cargo or luggage above 165 lbs(75 kg) on the roof rack may damage yourvehicle.When you carry large objects, never letthem hang over the rear or the sides ofyour vehicle.

o To prevent damage or loss of cargo asyou are driving, check frequently to makesure the luggage carrier and cargo arestill securely fastened.

o Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

o To use the roof rails as a roof rack, youmust fit the roof rails with two or morecrossrails or equivalent before carryingcargo or luggage on the roof.

o Loading cargo or luggage exceeding thespecification on the roof rack may re-duce the stability of your vehicle.

o Do not allow cargo loads to rest directlyon the roof of your article; cross railsmust be used.


76

B560A01JM

! WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the check engine"MIL" indicator illuminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.

o Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuelfiller cap, have one's hands in contactwith metal parts away from the filler neckto discharge static electricity.

o Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anything thatcan produce static electricity. Static elec-tricity discharge can ignite fuel vaporsresulting in explosion.

! WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light will illumi-nate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

!o When using a portable fuel container be

sure to place the container on the groundwhile refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. While starting re-fueling contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

o Do not use cellular phones around a gasstation. The electric current or electronicinterference from cellular phones canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

o When refueling always shut the engineoff. Sparks by electrical equipment ofthe engine can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire. After refueling, check to makesure the fuel filler cap is securely closed,and then start the engine.

o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotive fuelsare flammable.

WARNING:


77

!

Before closing the hood, return the support rodto its clip to prevent it from rattling. Lower thehood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above theclosed position and let it drop. Make sure that itlocks into place.

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o The support rod must be inserted com-pletely into the hole provided in thehood whenever you inspect the enginecompartment. This will prevent the hoodfrom falling and possibly injuring you.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

CAUTION:Make sure that the support rod has beenreleased prior to closing the hood.

!

2. Push the secondary latch lever to the left andlift the hood.

HJM2022

HJM2023

HOOD RELEASE

B570A03A-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HJM2020

HJM2021

3. Hold the hood open with the support rod.


78 FLOOR MAT ANCHOR

!

B571A03Y-AAT

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the anchored floor mat, otherwisethe additional mat may slide forward andinterfere with the movement of the ped-als.

B570A01JM-A

SUN VISOR

B580A01L-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sunvisor for the driver and front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the back of each sun visor.

B580A01JM

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

HJM2142-1

B585BA01JM-AAT

SUN VISOR EXTENDER

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extend-ers that may be used when the visor is in the sideglass position.


79FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

B620A01JMHJM2067

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER

!

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:

1. Push the lever downward to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever

by pulling it upward.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle which may causeserious injury or death.

B600A01A-AATB580C01LZ-AAT

TICKET HOLDER

The ticket holder is provided on the front of thesun visor for holding a tollgate ticket.

HJM2142


80

B610A01JM

HORN

B610A01L-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

HJM2043

REAR SEAT ARM REST

B611A01Y-AAT

This arm rest is located in the center of the rearseat back.

B660A01JM

Main Switch

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A01S-AAT

(If installed)

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).


81

B660C01JM

B660C04E-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pull thecontrol switch toward the steering wheel to the"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the followingactions will disengage the system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "P" or "N" position

(Automatic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the main switch.

!

5. To momently increase speed, depress theaccelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.

WARNING:To avoid accidental cruise control engage-ment, keep the cruise control main switchoff when not using the cruise control.

B660B01JM

B660B02E-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push in the cruise control main switch on theend of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will be illumi-nated. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the cruise control switch downward to"SET (COAST)" and release it. If the "SET"(COAST)" switch is selected the "CRUISE"and "SET"(COAST) indicator light in theinstrument cluster will be illuminated simulta-neously.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.


82

B660D01JM

B660D01E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch upward to the "RE-SUME (ACCEL)" position and hold it.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release thecontrol switch. While the control switch isheld, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch upward to the "RESUME(ACCEL)" position and release it, providing thevehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660B01JM

B660F02E-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch downward to "SET(COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decel-erate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch. While the control switchis pushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

! WARNING:o Keep the main switch off when not using

the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-control driving with amanual transaxle vehicle, do not shiftinto neutral without depressing theclutch pedal, or the engine will beoverrevved. If this happens, depress theclutch pedal or release the main switch.

o With the cruise control engaged, whenthe brake pedal is applied, it is normal tohear the cruise control system deacti-vate. This is an indication of normalsystem operation.


83

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET(COAST)" is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.


84 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01JM-GAT

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilators3. Windshield Defroster Nozzles4. Center Ventilators

B710B02O-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710C02HP-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR

The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe dash board. To change the direction of theair flow, move the knob in the center of the ventup-and-down and side-to-side. The vents areclosed when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are opened when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

B710A02JM


85

B670A01JM-AAT

There are three controls and two switches forthe heating and cooling system. They are:

1. Air flow control2. Fan speed control3. Temperature control4. Air intake control switch5. Air conditioning switch

HJM2109A

HJM2116A

B670B01A-AAT

Fan Speed Control(Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on and off andto select the fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the "1" and "4" position.

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670C02E-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes off when the air intake controlis fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is recirculation mode.

HJM2118A


86

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating in "Recirculation"mode ( ) may result in fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode ( ) selected mayresult in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to"Fresh" mode ( ) in floor, floor-defrostand defrost position. This is normal op-eration.

B670D01JM-GAT

Air Flow Control

HJM2111

HJM2110A

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Fivesymbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the side and center venti-lators.


87

HJM2114 HJM2113

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.

HJM2112

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, the floor vents, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill be turned on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.


88

HJM2115

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will beturned turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated to improve windshield defrost-ing.

MAXA/C

B670C02JM

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

* The A/C or the air intake control switchreturns to its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

OFF

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intake

Control Switch

or

OFF

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switchis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C modeselected.

o When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intakecontrol switch are set to the followingchart.


89

HJM2117

Cool Warm

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

B690A01E-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intakecontrol to the fresh air ( ) position and theair flow control to the floor ( ) position.

For faster heating, the air intake control shouldbe set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will be onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, rotate the temperaturecontrol to "Warm".

B690A01JM-A

HEATING CONTROLS

B670C03JM

OFF Off-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.


90 VENTILATIONBI-LEVEL HEATING

B710A01S-AATB700A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to "Face" ( ).

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01JM-A B710A01JM-A

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake control to( ).Be sure to return the control to ( ) whenthe irritation has passed to keep fresh air inthe vehicle. This will help keep the driver alertand comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control to the fresh air ( )position, fan speed to the desired position,turn on the air conditioning system, andadjust temperature control to desired tem-perature.


91

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may causefog to form on the exterior windshield because of the temperature difference. At this time set the air flowcontrol to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.

To remove interior fog on the windshield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"mode will be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to the warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".o Activate windshield wiper blade de-icer (If installed)

B720A01JM-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720B01JMB720B02JM

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:

A Type B Type A Type B Type


92

B740C01S-AAT

Dehumidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.

o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the air flow control to the "Face" ( ).o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740B01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Operation forCooling

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut offoutside air entry.

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing the switch. The air conditioning indicatorlight should come on at the same time.

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode( ).

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the "Recirculation ( )" position onthe air intake control.

B740B01JM-A

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch(If installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

HJM2119


93

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.


94 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

TYPE A (Without A.Q.S: Air Quality System)

B970B01JM

B970B02JM

B970B01JM-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Switch 2. Air Flow Control Switch 3. Display Window 4. Defroster Switch 5. Blower Fan Control Switch 6. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch 7. OFF Switch 8. Air Conditioning Switch 9. Air lntake Control Switch10.Air Quality System Switch

(If installed)

TYPE B (With A.Q.S: Air Quality System)


95

Photo sensor

HJM2086

NOTE:o If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode willreset to Centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from Cen-tigrade to Farenheit as follows;Press the "TEMP" down button and"AUTO" button simultaneously for 3secs. The display shows that the unit oftemperature is adjusted to Centigrade orFahrenheit.(°C→→→→→°F or °F→→→→→°C)

o Never place anything covering the sen-sor which is located on the instrumentpanel to ensure better control of theheating and cooling system.

B970C01JM-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling by doing as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator lightwill illuminate confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing the " " button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing the " " button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

HJM2124

HJM2126


96

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more airis delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.

HJM2123

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B670C02Y-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch(Without A.Q.S)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode, (Freshmode, Recirculation mode) push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on thebutton goes on when the air intake control isfresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is recirculation mode.

B670C01JM


97

B980C01JM-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch(With A.Q.S) (If installed)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF: ON

Fresh Mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and isheated or cooled according to the functionselected.

Recirculation Mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust Gas Cutoff Mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from theoutside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( )is automatically converted to the ( ) mode,to prevent exhaust gas from entering the ve-hicle.


tion of the heating system in recircula-tion mode ( ) will give rise to mistingof the windshield and side windows andthe air within the passenger compart-ment will become stale. In addition, pro-longed use of the air conditioning withthe recirculation mode ( ) selectedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to ( )mode except for the case you turned"OFF" the ignition switch in A.Q.S mode( ) beforehand. This is normaloperation. The air intake control is oper-

B980C01JM

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, and airfrom within the passenger compartment will bedrawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.


tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to " "mode (regardless of switch position).This is normal operation. The air intakecontrol operates in "AUTO" mode whenturning the ignition to the ON position ifthe "AUTO" mode was used before shut-ting off the engine.


98

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

!

ated in "AUTO" mode when turning theignition to the "ON" position if the"AUTO" mode was used before shuttingoff the engine.

CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".

HJM2111

B980E01E-GAT

Air Flow Control

HJM2128

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost airposition.

Face-LevelWhen selecting the "Face" mode, the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.


99

HJM2113 HJM2112

Floor-LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents, windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

Floor-Defrost LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrost vents,the floor vents and side defroster nozzle andside ventilator .

HJM2114

Bi-LevelWhen selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-tor light will come on and the air will be dis-charged through the face vents and the floorvents.


100 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

B760A03E-AAT

(If installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theblower unit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to thepage 6-18.

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 12,500 miles

(20,000 km) or once a year. If the car isbeing driven in severe conditions suchas dusty, rough roads, more frequent airconditioner filter inspections andchanges are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, itmust be checked by an authorized dealer.

!

B760A01E

Evaporator core

Filter

Heater core

Outside air

Inside air

Inside air

Blower fan

B980F01JM-GAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the ( )mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-frost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperature ishigher than 2°C, and automatically turns off if theambient temperature drops below 2°C.

B980F01JM


101STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges


102

!

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

B750B03Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

B750A04L B750A05L


103

K260A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (K260) (If installed)

K260A01JM

1. POWER ON-OFF/ VOLUME /MODE Control Knob

2. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

3. PRESET Button

4. MODE SelectBatton

5. BAND Selector

6. SCAN Button


104

K260B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD showsthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in the CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

MODE Control

After pressing the MODE select button, rotatethe knob clockwise or counterclockwise forthe desired tone quality.

2. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll. Releasebutton once the desired station is reached.

SEEK Operation (Automatic ChannelSelection)

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec or more.Releasing it will automatically tune to the nextavailable station with a beep sound.When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1second, releasing will automatically tune to thenext higher frequency and when the ( ) side ispressed longer than 1 second, releasing willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

3. PRESET STATION SELECTButton

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit on this unit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

4.MODE Select Button

Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE mode.The mode selected is shown on the display.After selecting the each mode, rotate the vol-ume control knob clockwise or counterclock-wise.


105

!BASS Control

To increase the bass, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the bass, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control)

Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasizerear speaker sound (front speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound. (Left speaker sound will beattenuated) When the control knob is turnedcounter clockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (Right speaker sound will be at-tenuated).

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.


106

K260C01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (K260) (If installed)

K260B01JM

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

3. FF/REW Button

4. REPEAT Button

5. SCAN Button

6. EJECT Button

1. Playing CD


107

B260D02O-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the play button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginningof the next track. Press once to skip back to the beginning of thetrack.

3. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button. When you releasethe button, the compact disc player will resumeplaying.

4. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.

5. SCAN Button

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed witha CD loaded, the CD will eject.

NOTE:o If the CD does not operate properly or if

the ER2 fault code is displayed, use oneof two methods to reset the CD deckfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.

Then, reinstall the audio fuse.- Diconnect the negative terminal of the

battery and wait 5 minutes. Then re-connect the negative battery terminal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.


108

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.


o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

!


109

HMP280A01TB-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M280) (If installed)

1. POWER ON-OFF VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Selector

M280A01JM

3. TUNE/SEEK SelectKnob (JOY STICK)

4. SCAN Button

5. Best Station Memory Button (BSM)

6. PRESET Buttons

7. Equalizer Button (EQ)

8. Adjustment Mode Select Button (A.MODE)


110

!

HMP280B01TB-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control

o The radio unit may be operated when theignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.Press the button to switch the power on. Thedisplay shows the radio frequency in theradio mode, the tape direction indicator in thetape mode or CDˆMP3 track in either theCDˆMP3 mode or CD AUTO CHANGERmode. To switch the power off, press thebutton again.

o Push the FMÂM, TAPE or CDˆMP3 to turnon that function without pushing PowerONÔFF control knob.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the band selector FMÂM changesthe AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode se-lected is shown on the display.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Push the TUNE select knob (JOY STICK)upwards or downwards to increase or de-crease the frequency. Release the knob whenthe station is selected.

SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Push the TUNE select knob (JOY STICK) to theright or left, the frequency will be automaticallytuned to the next higher or lower availablestation.

4. SCAN

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

When the BSM button is pressed the six chan-nels from the highest field intensity are selectednext and stored in memory. The stations se-lected are stored in the sequence frequencyfrom the first preset key.

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.


Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

WARNING:Don't operate the button and joy stick switchwhile driving. It can cause death or seriousinjury in case of an accident.


111

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. Beep sound will be heard whiledepressig the button. You should then re-lease the button, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 18 stations canbe programmed by selecting one AM andtwo FM station per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

7. EQUALIZER (EQ)

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

8. Adjustment Mode select Button(A.MODE).

Pressing the A.MODE button changes theBASS, BALANCE, TREBLE and FADER mode.The mode selected is shown on the display.After selecting the each mode, rotate the vol-ume control knob clockwise or counterclock-wise.

BASS Control

To increase the bass, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the bass, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound. (Left speaker sound will beattenuated) When the control knob is turnedcounter clockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (Right speaker sound will be at-tenuated).

TREBLE Control

Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

!

FAD (Fader Control)

Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasizerear speaker sound (front speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.



112

7. TAPE EJECT Button

1. FF/REW Button ( / )

HMP280C01TB-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M280) (If installed)

M280C01JM

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button ( / )

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

4. REPEAT Button

5. Equalizer (EQ)

6. DOLBY Button


113

H290D01O-GAT

1. FF/REW

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF ( ) button is pressed during PLAY orREW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF ( ) buttonis pressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW ( )button is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REW ( ) buttonpressed again during REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least 4sec. gap) can be accepted by the AUTO MUSICSelect button.

o Pressing the button will play the beginningof the next music segment.

o Pressing the button will start replay atthe beginning of the music just listened to.


o This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely depressing the programbutton. An arrow will appear in the display toshow tape direction.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on that functionwithout pushing power ONÔFF control knob.

4. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.


5. Equalizer (EQ)


6. DOLBY

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

7. TAPE EJECT

o When the button is pressed with a cassetteloaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the button is pressed during FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.






114




o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.




115

HMP280E01TB-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (COMPATIBLE WITH MP3/WMA/AAC) (M280) (If installed)

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

M280E01JM

3. Track UP/DOWN Button ( / )

5. RANDOM Button

4. REPEAT Button

6. EQUALIZER Button

7. CD EJECT Button

8. SCAN Button 9. BOOKMARK Button

10.JOY STICK

11.CD INDICATOR



116

H290F02O-GAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button the CD player will begin playingeven if the radio or cassette player is beingused.


o Push the CD˜MP3 button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFFcontrol knob.

NOTE:o Do not stick paper or tape etc., auto the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CD-R(RecordableCD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that isnot finalized. Please refer to the manualof CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RWsoftware for more information on final-ization process.

o Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be playedon this unit.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press button once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track. Press

button once to skip back to the beginning ofthe track.

4. REPEAT (RPT)

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press it again.

o To repeat the music within selected folder,press the RPT button for more than 2 sec-onds. To cancel, press it again. (MP3 CDonly)


5. RANDOM (RDM)

o Press the RDM button to listen the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order. Pressit again to cancel random play.

o To listen the music within the selected folderin random order, press the RDM button formore than 2 seconds. To cancel press itagain. (MP3 CD only)

6. EQUALIZER (EQ)



7. CD EJECT

When the button is pressed with a CD loaded,the CD will eject.


117

8. SCAN


o To playback the first 10 seconds of eachtrack in the selected folder, press the SCANbutton for 2 seconds or longer. (MP3 CDonly)

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.When you have reached the desired track.

9. BOOKMARK (MARK)

When the CD player unit is operating, the de-sired track on the disc can be bookmarked byusing the MARK button.

o Press the MARK button to bookmark thedesired track for more than 2 seconds.This will display the "√ " symbol on the LCDwith beep sound.To play the bookmarked tracks, press theMARK button within a second.

o Press the MARK button to erase thebookmarked tracks for more than 2 sec-onds.This will erase the bookmark and "√" symbolon the LCD with beep sound.

10. JOY STICK (ENT)

o You can skip the track by pushing the JOYSTICK to the left or right.After selecting the desired track, press theJOY STICK to playback the track.If you do not press the JOY STICK within 5seconds, the previous track will playbackagain.

o You can move through the folder by pushingthe JOYSTICK to up and down.After moving the desired folder, press theJOYSTICK to playback the selected track.If you do not press the JOYSTICK within 5seconds, the previous track will playbackagain. (MP3 CD only)


keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.


o The bookmarks are all erased when thecar battery is disconnected or power off.Therefore, all data will have to be setagain if this should occur.






118






o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.

!


119

HMP280G01JM-GAT

CD CHANGER OPERATION (M280) (If Installed)

1,4. Disc select Knob(JOY STICK) (ENT)

M280G01JM


3. Track UP/DOWN Button ( / )

5. REPEAT Button

6. RANDOM Button

7. SCAN Button

8. Equalizer (EQ)


120

B290H02JM-GAT

1. DISC Select Knob(JOY STICK)

To select the CD you want push the DISC selectknob (JOY STICK) to up and down. After select-ing the desired CD, push the change the discnumber.

2. FF/REW ( / )

If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold in the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track. Press once toskip back to the beginning of the track.

4. JOYSTICK

You can skip the track by pushing the JOYSTICK to the left or right.After selecting the desired track, press the JOYSTICK to playback the track.If you do not press the JOY STICK within 5seconds, the previous track will playback again.

5. REPEAT(RPT)

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel, pressagain.


6. RANDOM (RDM)

Press the RDM button to listen the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential, order. Press itagain to cancel random play.

7. SCAN


o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

8. EQUALIZER (EQ)



NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.




121

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.



o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-road asthe discs could be scratched and dam-aged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact discchanger.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc changer,genuine CDs are recommended.


122

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er7

Er8

HHH

B890A01TB-GAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE (M280 only)

If you see any error indication in the display while using the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the error indication,take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal CD disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.


After resetting the audio, push the eject button.

If tape is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

CAUSE

CDP DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

LOADING ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH


123

6. EQ Button

J290A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290A01JM

1. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Select Button

3. SEEK Select Button

4. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

5. BEST STATIONMEMORY

7. TUNE Select Knob /MODE Select Knob


124


J290B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUMEControl Knob

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,the tape direction indicator in the tape mode, orCD track in the CD AUTO CHANGER mode. Toswitch the power off, press the button again.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 andFM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

3. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button 1 sec. or more.When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher frequencyand when the ( ) side is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next lower frequency.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

5. Best Station Memory Button(BSM)

When the BSM button is pressed for two sec-onds or longer, the six channels from the high-est field intensity are selected next and storedin memory. The stations selected are stored inthe sequence frequency from the first presetkey.

6. EQ Button


4. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.


Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the AM / FM select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:o Press AM/FM selector to set the band for

AM, FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek, scan or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM and twoFM station per button.

7. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thefrequency and turn the knob counterclockwiseto reduce the frequency.


125

Mode Select Knob

Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCEmode.The mode selected is shown on the display.After selecting the each mode, rotate the modeselect knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

MID Control

To increase the MID, rotate the knob clockwise,while to decrease the MID, rotate the knobcounterclockwise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clock-wise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate theknob counterclockwise.

FAD (Fader Control)

Rotate the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the control knob isturned counterclockwise, front speaker soundwill be emphasized (rear speaker sound will beattenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize rightspeaker sound (left speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (right speaker sound will be at-tenuated).

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.


126

J290C01JM-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290C01JM

1.TAPE PROGRAM Button

3. DOLBY Button

4.REPEAT Button

5.AUTO MUSIC Select Button

6.FF/REW Button

2.EJECT Button


127

J290D01JM-GAT


This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely pressing the program button.The PLAY and an arrow will appear in the displayto show tape direction.

2. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed duringFF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

3. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

4. REPEAT Button



5. AUTO MUSIC Select Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least a 4sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSICSelect button.

o Pressing the will play the begin-ning ofthe next music segment.

o Pressing the will start replay at thebeginning of the music just listened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press the buttonagain.

6. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF button is pressed during PLAY or REWmode.

o PLAY starts when the FF button is pressedagain during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REW buttonis pressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o PLAY starts when the REW button pressedagain during REW mode.

CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.



!


128

1.LOAD Button

J290E01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER / CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)

J290E01JM

2.Playing CD

3.EJECT Button

4. DISC SelectButton

5.RANDOM Play Button

6.REPEAT Button7.TRACK UP/DOWN

8.FF/REW Button

9.SCAN Button

10.EQ Button


129

J290F02JM-GAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc playing will accommodate upto six discs.

To insert one disc do the following:

1. Press and release the LOAD Button.2. Green light on both sides of the slot will be

illuminated and the will blink ten times onthe display.

3. Load a disc while the is blinking. Insert adisc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull the disc in.

NOTE:o The disc can be only inserted while the

light is blinking.o This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm

discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.

When the disc is inserted, the disc will begin toplay automatically.

To insert multiple discs do the followings:

1. Press and hold the LOAD button for twoseconds or more.You will then hear two beeps and the greenlight on the both sides of the slot will beilluminated.

2. Load a disc while the is blinking. Inserta disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the numbers of thevacant disc will blink on the display continu-ously. If the next "DISC NO." is appeared onthe display with the both side of the slotilluminated, you can then load another disc.

3. Load the remaining disc by following the sameprocedures 1 and 2.When you finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CD loaded.

4. To load more than one disc but less than six,complete Steps 1 and 2. When you havefinished loading discs, press LOAD button tocancel the loading function or wait for 10seconds. The CD player will begin to play thelast CD loaded.

As each CD starts to play, the DISC number willappear on the display.

NOTE:The disc player takes up to six discs. Do nottry to load more than six.

2. Playing CD

o Press the 6CDC to start CD playback,during radio operation or cassette tape play-ing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if you pressthe 6CDC button the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.


3. EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressed witha CD loaded, the CD will eject.

o To eject all of the discs, press this button for2 seconds or more.

4.DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push "DISC " or "DISC " to change the disc number.


130

5. RANDOM Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential order, on all ofthe discs or on one disc.To use random, do the following:

o Press and release the RDM button to playthe tracks on all of the discs or on one discthat are loaded, in random order. RDM willappear in the display. Press RDM to turn ifoff.

6. REPEAT Button


o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

7. TRACK UP/DOWN


o Press once to skip forward to the begin-ning of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

8. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

9. SCAN Button


o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

10. EQ Button




keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heating sys-tem.









131






o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system off-roadsas the discs could be scratched anddamaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,genuine CDs are recommended.

!


132

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er8

HHH

no CD

B890A01Y-AAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.


Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal CD disc.



After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE

NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER


133CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS

B850A02L

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean. See drawing.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B850A01L

B860A01L


134

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

Head

Cotton applicator

B860A01JM

B860A02L

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsettling in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem,do not continue to use the tape in yourvehicle.


135

CAUTION:o Be sure to remove the antenna before

washing the car in an automatic carwash or it may be damaged.

o Before entering a place with a low heightclearance, be sure to adjust the roofantenna low.

o When reinstalling your antenna, it isimportant that it is fully tightened toensure proper reception.

!

ANTENNA

HJM2172

B870D01FC-GAT

Roof Antenna

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AMand FM broadcast signals.This antenna is a removable type. To removethe antenna, turn the antenna counterclock-wise. To install the antenna, turn the antennaclockwise.

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tapeis loose, tighten it by turning one of thehubs with a pencil or your finger. If the labelis peeling off, do not put it in the drivemechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, letit reach a moderate temperature beforeputting it in the player.

B860A03L

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-4Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5Manual Transaxle ......................................................... 2-6Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-12Traction Control System (TCS) .................................. 2-12Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............................. 2-14Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-154WD Lock System ...................................................... 2-18Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-18Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-19Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-21Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-23Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-27

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A02JM-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garageany longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the airintake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

!! WARNING:o The 2WD Tucson is not designed for off-

road use. The 4WD Tucson is designedprimarily for use on paved roads. How-ever, occasional use in off-highway con-ditions such as established unpavedroads and non-challenging off-roadtrails is allowed. The 4WD Tucson is notdesigned for blazing new trails, chal-lenging off-road conditions, or unpavedhill climbing. Exceeding the conditionsthat were intended for the vehicle's pri-mary design may result in injury or death.

o Utility vehicle has a significantly highercollision rate than other type of vehicles.

o Utility vehicle have higher ground clear-ance and a narrower track to make themcapable of performing in a wide varietyof off-road applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a higher centerof gravitiy than ordinary cars. An advan-tage of the higher ground clearance is abetter view of the road allowing you toanticipate problem. They are not de-signed for cornering at the same speedsas conventional 2-wheel drive vehiclesany more than low-slung sports cars aredesigned to perform satisfactorily un-der off-road conditions. If at all possible,avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

o In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a person wearing aseatbelt.

WARNING:

RISK OF ROLLOVER

! WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-signed to provide for safe ride and handlingcapability.Do not use a size and type of tire and wheelthat is different from the one that is origi-nally installed on your vehicle. It can affectthe safety and performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure to equipall four tires with the tire and wheel of thesame size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, you shouldnot use these tires for highway driving.


4 KEY POSITIONSTO START THE ENGINE

C040A01A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the car is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

!

C030A01E-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more that 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

C040A01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.


5

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

C070C01E-1

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

C050A01E-1

STARTING

!

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition

key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-tion to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.


6 OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

C070A02A-AAT

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

HJM3017

C050B01JM-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutralor the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed.

!


7

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harm-ful to the transaxle.

o If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press the clutchpedal down, and then shift into 1st orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result in pre-mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to fourthgear, caution should be taken not to inad-vertently press the gear lever sideways insuch a manner that second gear is en-gaged. Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to the pointthat the tachometer will enter the red-zone.Such over-revving of the engine may causeengine damage.

!

C070B02A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be fully returned tothe original position. Do not rest your foot on theclutch pedal while driving. This can cause un-necessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold thecar on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedalrapidly and repeatedly.

C070D02O-AAT

Recommended Shift Points

The shift points as shown on the chart arerecommended for optimum fuel economy andperformance.

Shift

from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

mph (km/h)

15 (20)

25 (40)

35 (55)

45 (75)


8

HJM3018

OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriously injuredor killed than a person wearing a seatbelt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

C090A01O-GAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent selection.

C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause themto overheat and malfunction. Instead, whenyou are driving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.This will help avoid over-revving the engine,which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.This gives you much better control of yourcar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into reverse. Thetransaxle can be damaged if you do not. Toshift into reverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.


9

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected, may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

C090A01JM

!

C090E01O-AAT

o D(Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four gear sequence.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During "D" rangeoperation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

!

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.


10

!o To maintain the required levels of ve-

hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

CAUTION:o In sports mode, The driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For en-gine protection, upward shifts are madeautomatically when the engine rpmreaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector lever back-wards (-) twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Sincesudden engine braking and/or rapid ac-celeration can cause a loss of traction,however, downshifts must be made care-fully in accordance with the vehicle'sspeed.

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forward

gears can be selected. To select reverseor park, move the selector lever to the "R"or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

C090F01JM-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make gearshifts simple.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift upone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once toshift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardsor backwards twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.

HJM3020


11

!

C090I02L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance section for theproper fluid recommendation.

!C090N03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.


o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.


o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the accelerater

pedal in slippery driving conditions suchas pulling out of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to the transaxle.Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.Rather, use an appropriate towingmethod.


12

! WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions. During theseconditions the vehicle should be driven atreduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM (TCS)

C300A03Y-GAT

(If installed)

C300A01JM-U

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car toaccelerate. It also helps to provide sufficientdriving force and steering performance as thecar turns.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS operation, a pulsation may befelt in the brake pedal when the brakes areapplied. Also, a noise may be heard in theengine compartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicate that theanti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.


13

!

Driving Hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure todecelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.

CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP con-trol function has been activated. It alsomeans that the road is slippery or your caris accelerating excessively. In this situa-tion, gently release foot pressure from theaccelerator pedal and maintain moderatespeed.

!

WARNING:Traction control is a driving aid; all normalprecautions for driving in inclement weath-er and on slippery driving surfaces shouldbe observed.

C310B02O-AAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the TCSswitch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP controlwill be deactivated. Adjust you driving accord-ingly. To turn the system back on, press theswitch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should gooff.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

2) When the traction control system is op-erating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click may beheard from the engine compartment;this is the sound of the traction controlbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after approximately three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the system checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in theTCS System while driving, TCS-OFF indicatorilluminates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,traction control is automatically deacti-vated.


14

!

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel size maycause the ESP system to malfunction. Whenreplacing tires, make sure they are the samesize as your original tires.

!C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator inthe instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the ESPswitch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stabilitycontrol will be deactivated. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. To turn the system back on, pressthe switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator shouldgo off.

NOTE:The ESP mode will automatically be turnedON after the engine is turned off and re-started.

WARNING:Electronic stability program is only a driv-ing aid; all normal precautions for driving ininclement weather and on slippery roadsurfaces should be observed.

ELECTRONIC STABILITYPROGRAM (ESP)

C310A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

C310A01JM-U

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) systemis designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-nering manuevers. ESP checks where you aresteering and where the vehicle is actually going.ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels andintervenes in the engine management systemto stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) systemis an electronic system designed to help thedriver maintain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute for safe drivingpractices. Factors including speed, road con-ditions and driver steering input can all affectwhether ESP will be effective in preventing aloss of control. It is still your responsibility todrive and corner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.


15

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP orESP-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the ESP-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION

! WARNING:This vehicle is designed primarily for onroad use. Driving the vehicle in challengingoff-road conditions may result in damageto the vehicle. Driving in conditions thatexceed the vehicle's intended design or thedriver's experience level may result in se-vere injury or death.

Driving 4WD Safely

(1)As always, be sure to wear the seat belt.(2)Do not drive in challenging off-road condi-

tions or areas that exceed the vehicle'sbasic design intent or the driver's experi-ence level.

(3)Drive at lower speeds in strong crosswinds.Because of your vehicle's higher center ofgravity, its stability will be affected in cross-winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehiclecontrol.

(4)Check the brake condition after driving in wetor muddy conditions. Press the brake sev-eral times as you move slowly until you feelnormal braking forces return.

(5)Do not drive the vehicle through water. (i.e.streams, rivers, lakes, etc.)

C350A02JM-AAT

(If installed)

Engine power can be delivered to all wheels.Full-time 4WD is useful when good traction isrequired, such as, when driving on slippery, wetor snow-covered roads and when moving outof mud. Your vehicle is not designed for chal-lenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD vehiclesare designed primarily to improve traction andperformance on paved roads and highways inwet and/or slippery conditions. Occasional off-road use such as established unpaved roadsand trails is considered normal use. It is alwaysimportant when traveling off-highway that thedriver carefully reduce their speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operating speed forthose conditions. In general, off-road conditionsprovide less traction and braking effectivenessthan on road conditions. These factors must becarefully considered when driving off-road.Keeping the vehicle in contact with the drivingsurface and under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for the safetyof him/herself and his or her passengers.


16

HJM1029Roll tester(Speedometer)

Temporary free roller

o In unavoidable cases, if the vehicle isbeing towed with all four wheels on theground, it should only be towed forward.

o While towing, check the following items.1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or

"ON".2. Place the shift lever in neutral (For

Automatic Transaxle, "N" position).3. Release the parking brake.

NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-hicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not formore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

(8)The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot betowed by an ordinary tow truck. Makesure that the vehicle is towed with allfour wheels raised off the ground.o Roadside Assistance Program:

Off-roading is not covered. To receiveservice, the vehicle must be on a publiclymaintained road.

o If the vehicle is towed with only twowheels raised off the ground, the 4WDsystem could be damaged.

(6)The stopping distance of the full-time 4WDvehicle differs very little from that of the 2WDvehicle.When driving on a snow-covered road or aslippery, muddy surface, make sure thatyou keep a sufficient distance between yourvehicle and the one ahead of you.

(7)Since the driving torque is always applied toall 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the con-dition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with fourtires of the same size and type.o When replacement of any of the tires or

wheels is necessary, replace all of themwith tires or wheels of the same size type.

o Rotate the tires and check the tire pres-sure at regular intervals.

! WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tires de-signed to provide for safe ride and handlingcapability.Do not use a size and type of tire and wheelthat is different from the one that is origi-nally installed on your vehicle. It can affectthe safety and performance of your vehicle,which could lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure to equipall four tires with the tire and wheel of thesame size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless de-cide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, you shouldnot use these tires for highway driving.


17

! CAUTION:o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being

raised on a jack, never start the engine orcause the tires to rotate.There is danger that rotating tires touch-ing the ground could cause the vehicleto go off the jack and to jump forward.

o If one of the front or rear wheels beginsto spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehiclecan sometimes be driven out by de-pressing the accelerator pedal further;however, avoid running the engine con-tinuously at high rpm because doing socould damage the 4WD system.

(10)When using tire chains, always attach themto the front wheels.

(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in themud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WDsystem could be damaged.

o In rare cases when it's unavoidable thata 4WD vehicle is to be inspected on a2WD roll tester, strictly follow the proce-dures.1. Check the tire pressures recom-

mended for your vehicle.2. Place the front wheels on the roll

tester as shown in the illustration.3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-

rary free roller as shown in the illustra-tion.

!

! WARNING:Keep away from the front of the vehiclewhile inspecting. This is very dangerous asthe vehicle can jump forward and causeserious injury or death.

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane charges orfast, sharp turns.


o In a collision, an unbelted person issignicantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a person wearing aseat belt.

o Loss of control may occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.


(9)For a speedometer test or inspection/main-tenance (I/M) program of a Tucson 4WDvehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamom-eter.

CAUTION:Never engage the parking brake while per-forming these tests.


18 GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of thecargo area cover behind the rear seat. Ifthere were an accident or a sudden stop,such objects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

!

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly while driving slowly until thebraking action returns to normal, taking careto keep the car under control at all times. Ifthe braking action does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call yourHyundai dealer for assistance.

4WD LOCK SYSTEM

C360A01O-GAT

(With Electronic Control 4WD)(If installed)

This 4WD system is designed for dividing thepower ratio automatically in normal driving con-ditions.During off-road or low-friction driving condi-tions, press the 4WD lock button to drive in full-time 4WD, dividing the power ratio to 50:50 in thefront and rear wheels. The 4WD lock indicatorlight in the instrument cluster is illuminated.This setup begins to get cancelled when thevehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h, and the func-tion is completely released at a speed of 40 km/h or higher. Conversely, the function is rerunwhen the speed again drops to 40 km/h or lower,and is fully established at speeds below 30 km/h.

To release the 4WD lock function, press the4WD lock button again.The 4WD lock indicator light in the instrumentcluster should go off.

C360A01JM-U

1) Pressing the 4WD lock button on the toughterrain, the driving power is equally distrib-uted to the front and rear.4WD lock keeps activating when not ex-ceeding 40 km/h.

2) Release the 4WD lock button on the normaldriving conditions.

C360A02JM


19

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engagethe parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle). If yourcar is facing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car from rolling.If your car is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep the carfrom rolling, block the wheels.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is an ac-cumulation of snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If thereis a risk that the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while you put thegear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or infirst or reverse gear (manual transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransaxle to overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when the car isstopped.

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.


20 SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. As soon as the engineis running smoothly, you can drive away. Invery cold weather, however, give your en-gine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.


21

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6. The level of chargein your battery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

NOTE:o Tire chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tirechains.

o Tire chains are to be used on front tiresonly.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01JM-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

WINTER DRIVING

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.


22

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parking brake.


23USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

!

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.


24

C190E01JM

x 100 = 10% (MAX)

C190E01JM-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

Total trailer weight

Tongue load Total trailer weight

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your ve-hicle and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail,the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerouslyacross other lanes of traffic and ultimately leavethe roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!


25

! WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.

Lbs. (kg)

Tongue

150 (68)

Engine

2.0L2.7L2.0L2.7L

Maximum Towable Weight

WithBrakeWithoutBrake

Trailer1500(680)2,000(907)

1,000(454)

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the cargo area can overloadthe rear axle. Redistribute the load andcheck the axle weight again.

! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart.


26

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near the redzone), taking the following actions mayreduce or eliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!C190F01O-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do nottow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear(manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatictransaxle).

4. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

5. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

7. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

8. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

9. During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

13.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

14.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

15.If the transaxle shifts frequently while goingup a hill, shift down one gear.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.


27

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F02JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01JM

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.


28

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(498 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

A B C

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C


29

C190G01JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center piller outerpanel.

The label shows the size of your originaltires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of the ve-hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sides of thecenterline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, or the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle.

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, or eitherthe maximum front or rear GAWR.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.


30

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they more as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strikes the driver or a passenger.

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-7If Your Car Must be Towed ......................................... 3-12Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-14If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-15 3

3


32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

HJM5008

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery.

Then attach the other end of the same cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Next, using the other cable, attachone clamp to the negative (-) post or cableof the booster battery. Then attach the otherend of that cable to a solid metal part of theengine of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery away from the battery. Do not con-nect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

HJM4001Booster battery

Dischargedbattery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

!

!

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if coolant has beenlost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there is aleak in the cooling system and this shouldbe checked as soon as possible by a Hyundaidealer.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).


5

!

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your vehicle, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

SPARE TIRE

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

D040A01JM-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

D040B01JM-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

To remove the spare tire

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the luggage mat.3. Remove the luggage under tray cover

to turn the lever toward "UNLOCK".4. Remove the luggage under tray.

HJM2167

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T155/90R16

60 psi (420 kPa)

36


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D050A02A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not applythe brakes immediately or attempt topull off the road as this may cause aloss of control. When the vehicle hasslowed to such a speed that it is safeto do so, brake carefully and pull offthe road. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a divided high-way, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxlein "P" (automatic) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

HJM4008

5. Turn the installation bolt counter-clockwise with a wheel nut wrench toremove the spare tire. After replac-ing the spare tire, install and tightenthe bolt firmly with your fingers untilthere is no more play in the spare tire.

3. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out onthe side of the vehicle that is awayfrom traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.


7CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

D060A02HP-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic) or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and that the parking brake isset, then:

D060A01JM

Remove the spare tire and remove thejack and tool bag from the luggagecompartment.

NOTE:The spare tire is located under theluggage compartment floor.

D060B01JM-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

HJM4007

! WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide for safe ride andhandling capability.Do not use a size and type of tire andwheel that is different from the onethat is originally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure toequip all four tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type, tread,brand and load-carrying capacity. Ifyou nevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheel com-bination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, youshould not use these tires for high-way driving.

38


D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

HJM4010

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HJM4015

D060C02A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the vehicle is raisedon the jack.

HJM4009

Flat tire


9

D060F03E-AAT

5. Raising the vehicle

After inserting the wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nutwrench

!

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

WARNING:Do not get under the vehicle when itis supported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the vehiclewhile the jack is being used.

D060G01JM-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem. Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. To putthe wheel on the hub, pick up the sparetire, line up the holes with the studs andslide the wheel onto them. If this isdifficult, tip the wheel slightly and getthe top hole in the wheel lined up withthe top stud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can be slid overthe other studs.

D060G01JM

310


!D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060H01JM

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub. Ifthere is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, thewheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

WARNING:

!WARNING:

If the vehicle has been driven re-cently, some pieces may be very hot.Use caution.

D060G02JM


11

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise. Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.

HJM4016

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-

D060J01JM

After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

312


IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

!

D080B02O-AAT

Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Vehicle

D080B03JM

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

!

D080A01JM

1)

2)

3)

dolly

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.


13

!1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

HJM4019

D080B02O-AAT

Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Vehicle

D080C04JM

dolly

dolly

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle. Be sure touse a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must be towedby lifting all 4 wheels or using the towing dolly.3) It is recommended that your vehicle be

towed with all the wheels off the ground.

314


For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front/rear of your vehicle. Be very carefulwhen attempting this procedure when the ve-hicle is on any unpaved surface to avoid dam-age to your vehicle.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed vehicleto steer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-hicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and not formore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

D080D02O-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWING

HJM4022

HJM4023

<Front>

<Rear>

Towing Hooks

Towing Hook

CAUTION:o The 4WD vehicle should never be towed

with the wheels on the ground. This cancause serious damage to the transaxleor the 4WD system.

o When towing the vehicle, take care not tocause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

!

D080C03JM

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.


15IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber. If you lock the keys inside your car andyou cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundaidealers can use special tools to open the doorfor you.

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-sion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperationand assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

E020C02A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. Use a goodquality car-washing solution and follow themanufacturer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundai dealer orauto parts outlet. Don't use strong householddetergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abra-sive cleaning powders as these may damagethe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.


4

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or itmay work into the surface of the leather, caus-ing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.


6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

5

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3

F020A02Y-AAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-4.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.


4

R: 100.000 miles / 120 months

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B02JM-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSES

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

AIR FILTER-CANISTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) - 2.0L

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED) - 2.7L

VALVE CLEARANCE (2.0L only)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

I

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

I

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

45

72

36

R

I

52.5

84

42

R

R

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

I

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

I

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

105

168

84

R

R

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

120

192

96

R

I

I

I

R

R

R

I

127.5

204

102

R

135

216

108

R

I

142.5

228

114

R

150

240

120

R

I

I

I

R

R

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.


5

Note : (1) When replace drive belt and inspect water pump.(2) For every 48 months or 37,200 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first : "I"

For every 72 months or 56,000 miles (90,000 km), whichever occurs first : "R"(3) Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).(4) lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)(5) For every 12 months or 12,500 miles (20,000 km) whichever occurs first :"R"

F030C02JM-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT

COOLANT

TIMING BELT (WHEN REPLACE TIMING BELT AND INSPECT

WATER PUMP : 2.7L) (See Note (2)- 2.0 L)

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)

PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD)

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

2.0 DOHC (ALT, W/PUMP) See Note (1)

2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

7.5

12

6

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

30

48

24

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

60

96

48

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

90

144

72

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

105

168

84

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

120

192

96

I

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

150

240

120

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

See Note (3)

See Note (4)

See Note (5)


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal tempera

ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roadsD- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

F040A02JM-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

*1. Transfer case Oil ended Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTERTIMING BELT(WHEN REPLA CE TIMING BELT and INSPECT WATER PUMP : 2.7L)AIR CLEANER FILTERSPARK PLUGSBRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORSREAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKESTEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINTDRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTSMANUAL TRANSAXLE OILAUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUIDAIR CONDITIONER FILTERTRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

I/R

RRI

I

IIRRRRR

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHSINSPECT EVERY 20,000MILES (32,200 KM)REPLACE EVERY 40,000MILES (64,400 KM)MORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLYEVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHSEVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)MORE FREQUENTLYEVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)EVERY 50,000 MILES (80,000 KM)

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, F, G, H, I, K

C, D, F, G

C, EB, HC, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, GC, E, FA, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, JA, C, E, F, G, H, IC, E,C, E, G, IC, E, G, I


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060A01A-AAT F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060F01O-AAT

o Vacuum Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS


8

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according tothe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possible leaksbefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E04A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands approved by HyundaiMotor Co., when adding or changing fluid. Usingthe wrong ATF may result in damage to theATM.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F065F01O-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hose

Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heatand/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittlerubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterioration. Par-ticular attention should be paid to examine thathose surface nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hosedoes not come in contact with any heat source,sharp edges or moving component which mightcause heat damage or mechanical wear. In-spect all hose connections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hose should bereplaced immediately if there is any evidence ofdeterioration or damage.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070H01O-AAT

o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake discs and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-10Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-13Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-14Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-16Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-17Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-18Checking the Free-play ............................................... 6-19Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-21Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-21Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-23Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-24Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-26Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-34Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-35

6

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01JM-GAT

(2.7 Gasoline)

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir3. Air cleaner4. Fuse and Relay box

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir6. Engine oil level dipstick7. Coolant reservoir cap8. Engine oil filler cap

9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Ve-hicle with Automatic Transaxle)

10. Radiator cap11. Battery

G010A01JM

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects carefullyso that the plastic cover of theengine is not damaged.

!

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010B01JM-AAT

(2.0 Gasoline)

G010B01JM

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Engine oil level dipstick8. Coolant reservoir cap

9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)

10. Radiator cap11. Battery

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects carefullyso that the plastic cover of theengine is not damaged.

!


4 GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning correctly,inspect it carefully and seek assistance fromyour Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

G020A01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition


5CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.

Wait five minutes , then remove the dipstick,wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdrawit again. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW") range.

G030C01JM

DOHC V6

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

The engine oil quality should meet the followingclassification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, secondary recommendedengine oil for corresponding tempera-ture range can be used.


6

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

!

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or reversegear (manual transaxle).

G030D01JM-AAT

Adding Oil

G030D01JM

DOHC V6

G040A01GK

DOHC V6

G040A01JM-AAT


7

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mountingsurface on the engine is clean and that theold gasket is removed completely. Lubricatethe new gasket on the filter with clean engineoil before installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.

! WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new washer andretighten by turning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.7L)4.0 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.0L)

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure tohave your drain pan in place underneath it.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil using bya funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damagemay occur if overfilled.

!

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the householdtrash.


8

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cool. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

G050C01JM


9

!

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized ordistilled water. Continue to add clean dem-ineralized or distilled water in small quantitiesuntil the fluid level stays up in the radiatorneck.

6. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".

7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

G050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

HJM5034

G050D01JM

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.


10 SPARK PLUGS

G060B01JM-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

NOTE:o When replacing the spark plug, genuine

Hyundai replacement parts are recom-mended.

o It is recommended that the spark plugshould be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer. (2.7 L)

o Do not clean or regap spark plugs.

G060C01JM-AAT

Changing the Spark Plugs

You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.

1. Remove the center cover (2.0L) on theengine rocker cover.

2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that hasaccumulated around the base of the sparkplug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when thespark plug is removed.

3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straightup on the insulated connector, not the cable.Pulling on the cable may damage the carboncore conductor.

TYPE

IFR5G-11 (NGK)

PFR5N-11(NGK)

RC10YPB4 (CHAMPION)

REMARK

2.7

(Iridium Coated)

2.0L

(Platinum Coated)

G060C01JM

Recommended Spark Plugs:


11

HJM5038

CHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

G070A01E-AAT

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper

air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

!

6. To install the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.

NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened to speci-fication. Over-tightening can damage thethreads in the aluminum cylinder head.Also, leaving them too loose can cause thespark plug to get very hot and possiblyresult in damage to the engine.

7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulatedconnector directly down onto the electrode.Check to be sure it has snapped into placeand can't fall off.

! WARNING:It is recommended that the engine be coolor cold when changing the spark plugs. Ifthe engine is hot, you could burn yourselfon the insulated connector, the spark plugor the engine itself.

4. When preparing to remove the old sparkplug, guide the socket down over the sparkplug, being careful not to damage the ce-ramic insulator.

5. To remove the old spark plug, turn thewrench handle in a counterclockwise direc-tion.

G060C02JM

G060C03JM


12

G090A01JM

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G090A01JM-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thefront and rear washer systems.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer should not be operated if thewasher reservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.

!

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundai re-placement parts or their equivalent.

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline, etc.

HJM5032


13CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL(MANUAL)

G100A02JM-AAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF75W/85 (API GL-4) or EQUIVALENT in themanual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.2U.S. quarts (2.1 liters).

HJM5009

Filler plug

Drain plug

G100B01L

!

G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual Transaxle FluidLevel

WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.

2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel insidethe hole. The oil level should be at its bottomedge. If it is not, check for leaks beforeadding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring theoil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches theproper level. Do not overfill.

3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.


14

!

!

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

G110C01JM-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hotso you should exercise great care not toburn yourself during this procedure.

G110B04A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III DIAMOND ATF SP-III SK ATF SP IIIor other brands approved by Hundai Motor Co,.Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is notcovered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically redcolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isa normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5. HJM3018

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle. Onlyuse HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., Ifyou are having your vehicle serviced at afacility other than a Hyundai dealer, verifyATF is used for your vehicle.


15

HJM5011

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

HJM5044

CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!


16

HJM5007

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

G130A01A-AAT

To Check the Clutch Fluid

The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time. Checkto make certain that the clutch fluid level isalways between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HJM5007


17

!

G130B02A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. Thereservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoidcontamination from foreign matter or moisture.

NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to contami-nate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if you get it in youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

G190A01GK

DOHC CVVT V6

Water Pump Pulley

0.2~0.24 in.(5~6 mm)

Power steering

COMP

Autotensioner

Alternator Pulley

Crankshaft Pulley

Alternator

Eng.pulley

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140D02A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

!

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.


18

When the air conditioning is being used regu-larly, the compressor drive belt tension shouldbe checked at least once a month with theengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press down onthe belt halfway between the engine crankshaftand compressor pulleys. Pressing with yourfinger, you should not be able to deflect this beltanymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is tooloose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

CHANGING THE AIRCONDITIONER FILTER

B145A02JM-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theevaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.

2. Lower the glove box down completely bypushing the both sides of the glove boxinward.

1. Open the glove box and remove the supportstrap through the hole.

HJM2133

HJM2136

HJM2134


19

G150A01JM

3. Remove the air conditioner filter cover bypressing both side's clips.

HJM2135 !

B145A01JM

4. Remove the air conditioner filter by lifting it.5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-

bly.

CAUTION:Be sure to install the air conditioner filter inthe direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise,noise or filter damage may result.

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

1.18 in.(30 mm)


20

G180A01L

G160A01HRG160A01HR

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

G180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

2.95 in. (75 mm)

G160A01A-AAT

CLUTCH PEDAL FREE PLAY

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired ifnecessary.

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.(6 ~ 13 mm)

G170A01A-AAT

BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration above. If it is not, have itinspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.(3 ~ 8 mm)


21

G190A01GK

DOHC CVVT V6

Water Pump Pulley

0.2~0.24 in.(5~6 mm)

Power steering

COMP

Autotensioner

Alternator Pulley

Crankshaft Pulley

Alternator

Eng.pulley

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted if necessary. At thesame time, belts should be examined for cracks,wear, fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,the new belt should be adjusted again after twoor three weeks to eliminate slack resulting frominitial stretching after use.

G190A01A-AAT

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

!

G200B01JM-AAT

Replacing Accessory Fuses

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found on the left side ofcrash pad. Inside the box you will find a listshowing the circuits protected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electrical

G200A03A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box in theengine compartement for easy inspection.

HJM4002

G200A01JM

Open-Replace Good


22

G200B02L

!fuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace afuse and it blows as soon as the accessoryis turned on, the problem is serious andshould be referred to a Hyundai dealer fordiagnosis and repair. Never replace a fusewith anything except a fuse with the sameor a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-ity fuse could cause damage and create afire hazard.

Good Open-Replace

NOTE:See page 6-35 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

accessories stop working, a blown (open) fusecould be the reason. If the fuse has opened, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasmelted through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.

Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in thefuse box to simplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if youfind one that appears to have opened.

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new

G200B01JM


23CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

HJM5008

!

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.


24 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G230A01JM


25HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

!

6. Draw a vertical line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) and a horizon-tal line (through the center of each headlightbeam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

G290A02O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights (Low beam).

5. Open the hood.

G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be replacedif there is severe surface cracking, pulling,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

G290A01JM

Verticalaiming

Horizontalaiming


26 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

!

G260A02A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.

See page 6-34 for the wattage description.

CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

SPECIFICATION:

"H";Horizontal center line of headlights fromground: 35.6 in.(904 mm)

"W";Distance between each headlight center:53.4 in.(1,356 mm)

"L";Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against:118 in. (3,000 mm).

G290B01JM-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming chart as shown in the illustration. Turn onthe headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light isparallel to center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof headlights.

G290B01B

L

W

HC u t - o f fline

Ground line

"P"

Horizontal line

Verticalline

30 mm


27

HJM5016

HJM5013

HJM5017

G270A02O-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,remove the headlight assembly mountingbolts.

HJM5012

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.


28

G270B01JM-AAT

Rear Combination Light

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.

9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

11.Check for proper headlight aim.12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,

remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb. Do not touch the glass of the newbulb.

HJM5018 G270A03O

HJM5020

HJM5021


29

HJM5022

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

G270I02JM-GAT

Front fog Light (If installed)

HJM5047

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the bolts with a wrench.

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HJM5049

HJM5050

4. Replace to the new bulb.HJM5048

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting screws as shown

with a phillips screwdriver.

3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light, turn signal light, back-up light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Turn signal light(3) Back-up light(4) Tail light

4. Install the new bulb.


30

G270C02JM-AAT

Cargo Light

1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-

driver.

3. Replace to the new bulb.

HTB284

G270C02TB-GAT

Luggage Compartment Light(If Installed)

G270C01JM

1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screwdriver.

2. Disconnect the power cord.

G270C02JM

HJM5023


31

G270E01JM

G270E01O-AAT

Front Side Marker Light

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw-driver.

2. Disconnect the connector.

3. Replace with a new bulb.

HJM5024 G270E02HR

G270E03HR

3. Replace with a new bulb.


32

G270G01O-AAT

Interior Light

1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-driver.

G270H01O-AAT

Glove Box Illuminated Light

1. Open the glove box.2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw-

driver.

HJM5025

HJM5026

HJM50452. Replace with a new bulb.


33

3. Disconnect the connector.4. Replace with a new bulb.

HJM5039

HTB284


34 BULB WATTAGE

G280A01JM-AAT

Part NameFront Postion LightGlove Box Illuminated LightHead Light (Low/High)Interior Light

Front Fog Light (If installed)Turn Signal LightSide MarkerFront Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)

No.1234

5678

Wattage5

1055/60

1010272155

Wattage10

1021215

21/5

No.9

10

1112131415

Part NameCargo Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light (LED Type)

Luggage Compartment LightTurn Signal LightBack-up LightLicense Plate LightStop/Tail Light

Map LightRoom Light

A TYPEB TYPE

2.45

G280A01JM-U


35FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01JM-GAT

Engine Compartment

G200C01JMNOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

FUSE

RATING

30A

30A

50A

50A

30A

40A

30A

30A

15A

10A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Start relay, Ignition switch

Engine control, Fuel pump , A/C, Generator, ATM

Ignition switch, Power connector

Cooling fan

ABS, ESP

ABS, ESP

Blower

Ignition switch, Power connector

Injector

Cooling fan, Stop lamp switch, Oxygen sensor, ECM/PCM

DRL

Front fog lamp

Horn, Siren

A/C

Head lamp (HIGH)

Head lamp (LOW)

IGN

ECU

BATT #1

C/FAN

ABS #1

ABS #2

BLOWER

BATT #2

INJ

SNSR

DRL

F/FOG

HORN

A/CON

H/LP (HI)

H/LP (LOW)

FUSIBLE

LINK

FUSE

DESCRIPTION


36

G200E01JM-AAT

Inner Panel

G200E01JM


37

FUSE

P/WDW-LH

P/WDW-RH

TAIL RH

RR HTR

A/BAG

CLUSTER

TAIL LH

AUDIO

C/LIGHTER

& P/OUTLET

SPARE

RR FOG

HTD MIRR

AUDIO

IG COIL

IMMO

P/OUTLET

S/HTR

A/CON SW

START


Left power window

Right power window

Right rear combination lamp, Glove box lllumination

Rear defogger

SRS control

Instrument cluster, ETACM/TACM

Left head lamp, Left rear combination lamp, License lamp

Digital clock, Audio, Power outside mirror folding module, Power outside mirror & mirror folding switch

Cigarette lighter

(SPARE)

Rear fog lamp

Left/Right power outsider mirror & mirror folding motor, Rear defogger switch

Audio

Ignition coil (2.7 L)

Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)

Rear power outlet

(Not used)

Seat warmer

A/C control module (Manual A/C)

Theft alarm relay, Transaxle range switch, lgnition lock switch

FUSE

RATING

30A

30A

10A

30A

15A

10A

10A

10A

20A

15A

10A

10A

10A

20A

10A

15A

10A

20A

10A

10A


38

FUSE

IG-SW

ROOM LP

AMP

T/SIG

A/BAG IND

RR WIPER

A/CON

IGN

HAZARD

S/ROOF

STOP

H/FREE

ECU

FF WIPER

4WD

DEICER

TCU

ABS


Ignition switch

Room lamp, A/C control module, Digital clock, ETACM/TACM Key remind switch

Audio

Hazard switch, Auto light & Photo sensor, Transaxle range switch

Instrument cluster

Safety relay

Sunroof controller, A/C control module, Blower relay, ETACM/TACM

PTC heater relay, Fuel filter heater relay, DRL CONTROL MODULE, head LAMP RELAY

Hazard switch, Hazard relay, Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)

Sunroof, Door lock/unlock relay

Stop lamp switch, Power outside mirror folding module

(Not used)

Cruise control, Stop lamp, TCS, ESP, 4WD ECM, ECM, PCM, TCM, Vehicle speed sensor

Front wiper, Multifunction switch

4WD/ECM

Windshield defogger

TCM (2.7 L)

G-Sensor, ESP, ABS

FUSE

RATING

30A

10A

20A

10A

10A

15A

10A

10A

10A

20A

15A

10A

10A

20A

20A

15A

10A

10A

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicleperformace.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies filtered air to thecrankcase through the air intake hose. Insidethe crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through the PCV valveand into the induction system.

H010A02O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control Sys-tem)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, discon-nect the ABS connector in the enginecompartment. (2.7 V6 only)

o For more information, see shop manual(Wheel Speed Sensor).

o After dynamometer testing is completed,erase the ABS/TCS DTC (DiagnoticTrouble Code) with a GST (Generic ScanTool) or Hi-Scan Pro.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the canister. When theengine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed inthe canister are drawn into the induction systemthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

H020A01JMCatalytic Converter

! WARNING:o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is

your best source of assistance.o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-

bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-4Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-6Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-8Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-9Tire Rotation.................................................................. 8-9Tire Balancing ............................................................... 8-9Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-10When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-10Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-11Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-11Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-11Consumer Information ................................................. 8-12Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-14

CONSUMER INFORMATION

88

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A02JM-AAT The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. Lower side of the front passenger seat underthe carpet.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the left center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

I010A03JM I010B01GK

V6DOHC (I4)

I010A02JM

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

3

!

TIRES

I030A01JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRES-SURES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

HJM1032

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more thanone mile (1.6 km) since startingup.)

!I030A01JM

WARNING:o Lower-than-recommended tire

pressures cause uneven treadwear, poor handling, poor fueleconomy or tire failure.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures can cause poor han-dling, uneven tread wear or tirefailure.


4

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

at them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gage. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

I030B01JM-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your vehicle. Beespecially careful about overload-ing if you equip your vehicle witha luggage rack.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by looking


5

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size (example: P235/60R16 99T)

o The "P" indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (235): This num-ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two (or three) digit number (99):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port.

o T: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. Indicates tire isin compliance with the U.S. De-partment of Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.


6

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-12.


7

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofa asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that faces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letter-ing or bears manufacturer, brand and ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire and uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.


8

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage loadVehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantrally reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire trac-tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on thetire side wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.


9

HEF-241

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

!I060A01O-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check wheel nut torque.

CAUTION:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-plyunder any circumstances. This maycause dangerous handling charac-teristics.

!

I050A04A-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

WARNING:o Drive at lower speeds when driv-

ing on roads covered with snow orice.

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o If you hear noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3 ~ 0.6miles.


10

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

HJM5031

I090A02JM-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators . The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc., The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

TWI indicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.


11SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

HJM4007

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

I090B01JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

! WARNING:Your vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide for safe ride andhandling capability.Do not use a size and type of tire andwheel that is different from the onethat is originally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure toequip all four tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type, tread,brand and load-carrying capacity. Ifyou nevertheless decide to equipyour vehicle with any tire/wheel com-bination not recommended byHyundai for off-road driving, youshould not use these tires for high-way driving.


12

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

I120A02A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.


13

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A


14 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C01A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Departmentof Transportation, Washington. D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

Hyundai Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Hyundai Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, Cali-fornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, NewMexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,Wyoming.

Hyundai Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Hyundai Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

9

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J010A01JM-AAT

MEASUREMENT

170 (4,325)

70 (1,795)

66 (1,680)

103 (2,630)

60 (1,540)

60 (1,540)

Overall Length

Overall Width

Overall Height (Unladen)

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

J060A01JM-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01JM-AAT

POWER STEERING

in. (mm)

Engine

2.7L

2.0L

Fuel tank capacity

17 us.gal (65L)

15 us.gal (58L)

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.5 in. (142 mm)

Vane type

J030A01JM-AAT

TIRE

Standard

Option

Spare

215/65R16

235/60R16

T155/90R16 (Temporary)

2WD

4WD

J050A01JM-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Battery

Alternator

J040A01JM-GAT

ELECTRICAL

MF 60 AH, MF 68 AH

2.0L

2.7L

90A (13.5V)

120A (13.5V)

CBS (With ABS)

ABS

CBS, ABS

Drum type

Disc type

Disc type

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

GASOLINE

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

2.7 V6

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

86.7 × 75.0

2,656

1-2-3-4-5-6

Auto lash

Auto lash

Auto lash

Auto lash

650 ± 100

BTDC 12° ± 5°

2.0 DOHC

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC

82 × 93.5

1,975

1-3-4-2

700 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve Clearance

(Cold engine : 20±5°C)

Spark plug gap

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing

ENGINE

J070A01JM-AAT

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)

For adjusting

For checking

Intake

Exhaust

Intake

Exhaust

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS SAE MTF SAE 75W/85 (API GL-4)HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III orother brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiatorPSF-3 TYPE FLUIDDOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

ItemEngine Oil

Transaxle Manual

Automatic

Transfer caseRear AxleCoolantPower steering gearBrakes and clutch fluid

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A02JM-AAT

Q'ty u.s.qts. (liter)Drain and refill with oil filter

2.0 L : 4.23 (4.0)2.7 L : 4.76 (4.5)

2.2 (2.1)

8.2 (7.8)

0.8 (0.8)0.8 (0.75)7.4 (7.0)0.95 (0.9)As required

1010

INDEX

10 INDEX

2

AAir bag ...............................................................................................1-30Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-11Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-17Operation ............................................................................ 1-92, 6-17Switch ........................................................................................... 1-92

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-135Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-60Audio System

Cassette Tape player operation (J290) ................................... 1-126Cassete tape player operation (M280) .................................... 1-112Compact disc player operation (K260) .................................... 1-106Compact disc player operation (M280) .................................... 1-115CD changer operation (M280) .................................................. 1-119Compact disc player / CD Auto changer operation (J290) ..... 1-128Stereo radio operation (J290) ................................................... 1-123Stereo radio operation (K260) .................................................. 1-103Stereo radio operation (M280) .................................................. 1-109

BBattery ..................................................................................... 2-20, 6-23Brake

Anti-lock brake system ................................................................ 2-12Traction control system (TCS) ...................................................2-12Checking the brakes ....................................................................6-15

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ...................................................2-14Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-13Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-20Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-20Practices ......................................................................................2-18

Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3Bulb Replacement .............................................................................6-26

CCare of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-133Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-133Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7Child Restraint System .....................................................................1-23

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System .....................................................1-25

Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System .... 1-26Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................1-58Clock ................................................................................................. 1-58Clutch

Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-16Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-20

Combination LightAuto light .......................................................................................1-54Headlight flasher ..........................................................................1-53Headlight switch ...........................................................................1-53High-beam switch ........................................................................1-53Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-53Parking light auto off .....................................................................1-53Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-52

10INDEX

3

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-12Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-24Corrosion protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control ...................................................................................1-80

DDefrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-91Door

Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-7Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-79

Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-59Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-21Driving

Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-19Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-20Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-20

EEmission Control System ................................................................... 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-4Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-8Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-48If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4

Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ..................................................2-2

F4WD Lock System ............................................................................ 2-18Fan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-85Floor Mat Anchor ..............................................................................1-78Fog Light

Front .............................................................................................1-56Front Seats

Adjustable front seats ..................................................................1-12Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-13Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..........................................1-12Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-12

FuelCapacity .........................................................................................9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-48Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-75

Full-time 4WD Operation ..................................................................2-15Fuses ................................................................................................6-21Fuse panel description ...................................................................... 6-35

GGeneral Checks .................................................................................. 6-4Glove Box ..........................................................................................1-64

10 INDEX

4

HHazard Warning System ..................................................................1-56Heating and Cooling Control ............................................................. 1-84Heating and Ventilation

Air flow control ..............................................................................1-86Air intake control switch ...............................................................1-85Bi-level heating .............................................................................1-90Defrosting / Defogging .................................................................1-91Fan speed control (Blower control) .............................................1-85Temperature control ....................................................................1-89

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light .........................................................1-75Hood Release ....................................................................................1-77Horn ................................................................................................. 1-80How to Use Luggage Room ............................................................. 1-71

IIgnition Switch ......................................................................................2-4Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-42Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) .......................................1-58Interior Light .......................................................................................1-63

JJump Starting ......................................................................................3-3

KKeys ................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-15Positions .........................................................................................2-4

LLight Bulbs Replacement ..................................................................6-26Luggage Compartment Light ............................................................1-70Luggage Net ......................................................................................1-74

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rear View Mirror With Compass ................ 1-67Day-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-67Outside rearview mirror ...............................................................1-65Outside rearview mirror Heater ..................................................1-66

OOdometer / Trip Odometer ...............................................................1-50Occupant Classification System ......................................................1-35

PParking Brake ....................................................................................1-69Power Outlet ......................................................................................1-59Power Steering Fluid Level ...............................................................6-24

10INDEX

5

RRear Seat

Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-15Folding rear seatback .................................................................. 1-15

Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-57Reporting Safety Defects .................................................................8-14Risk of Rollover ................................................................................... 2-3Roof Rack .........................................................................................1-74

SSeat

Front ............................................................................................. 1-12Rear .............................................................................................. 1-15Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-14

Seat Belts3-point system .............................................................................1-20Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-28Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-21Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-19Precautions .................................................................................. 1-17

Shop Manual ......................................................................................8-11Shopping Bag Holders ...................................................................... 1-70Sound

Brake pad warning sound ............................................................1-48Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-64Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-49Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-6

Steering Wheel Free play .................................................................6-19Steering Wheel Tilt Lever ..................................................................1-79Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-101Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-60Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-78

TTachometer .......................................................................................1-49Tail Gate ............................................................................................1-69

Tail gate window ...........................................................................1-69Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8Ticket Holder ..................................................................................... 1-79Tires

Balancing ........................................................................................ 8-9Chains ............................................................................................8-9Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-7If you have a flat tire .......................................................................3-6Information ......................................................................................8-2Maintenance .................................................................................8-11Pressure .........................................................................................8-3Replacement ................................................................................8-10Rotation .......................................................................................... 8-9Sidewall Labeling ............................................................................ 8-4Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-8Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5Terminology and Definition ............................................................ 8-6

10 INDEX

6

Traction ........................................................................................ 8-10Towing

A trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-23Emergency ...................................................................................3-14If your car must be towed ............................................................3-12

Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-12Transaxle

Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-8Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-14Manual ............................................................................................2-6Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-13

Trip Computer ...................................................................................1-50

VVehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2Vechcle Load Limit ............................................................................ 2-27Vehicle Specifications

Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3Lubrication chart .................................................................. 9-4 ~ 9-5Measurement ................................................................................. 9-2

WWarning and Indicator Lights ............................................................1-44Windows

Power ........................................................................................... 1-11Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-54

Rear Window wiper and washer switch ......................................1-55Windshield Wiper Blade De-icer ....................................................... 1-57Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-12Winter Driving ....................................................................................2-21

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Seoul Korea

Printing: OCT. 22, 2004Publication No.: A2EO-EU40CPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 2.7L: 17 (14.3, 65), 2.0L: 15 (12.8, 58)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-13.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuelefficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperaturesare above 0°F (-18°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil levelshould be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector leverthrough all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check thelevel of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved byHyundai Motor Co.,

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2o Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-44 ~ 1-47o Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-12o Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-5o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-14

Documents

2005 Hyundai Tucson Owners Manual